Efd 1000 Install Manual

EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.
X Installation Manual

EFD1000 and EFD500
Software Version 2.X
Installation Manual

Includes Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
Aspen Document # 900-00012-001 Revision D
in Appendix D

Aspen Document # 900-00003-001 Rev G

DOCUMENT # 900-00003-001 PAGE 1-256 Revision G
Copyright 2010 Aspen Avionics Inc.
EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual
Special Notes to the Installer

It is important to review the entire Installation Manual before installing the EFD1000/500. The following
items are of special note and should be considered for planning and installation.

1. This manual covers the installation of a single PFD and also covers installations where a PFD is
accompanied by an EFD1000 and/or EFD500 MFD. There are important limitations to the allowable
configurations. To avoid unsatisfactory results, refer to the Requirements and Limitations in Section 5,
Pre-Modification Planning before beginning the installation.
2. The integral EFD1000 ADAHRS uses accelerometer, rate gyro, air data and magnetic inputs to derive the
attitude solution. Airspeed and altimeter maintenance checks will generate warnings on the EFD1000
display and produce changes in the displayed attitude. This is normal.
3. Correct replacement and proper placement of the aircraft instruments is critical to maintain the aircraft
certification. Certain instruments can be removed. More importantly, certain instruments must not be
removed. Installation of an EFD1000 MFD with EBB authorizes removal of standby airspeed and altitude
instruments. In all cases, a standby attitude instrument must be retained. See Section 5.
4. The EFD1000 does not provide a synchro heading bootstrap output. If equipment remains on the
aircraft that uses a bootstrap input and which can not accept a low speed ARINC 429 input from the
EFD1000, then the bootstrap-enabled slaved compass system should be retained.
5. The EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD and/or EFD500 MFD are powered from the Battery Bus, not the
Avionics Bus. Connection through the avionics bus is not approved, and is not eligible to be approved
as a deviation to the STC. Separate EFD (1000 and 500) master switches are required for each display.
6. The RSM contains magnetic elements that are used to derive the aircraft heading and attitude. The RSM
is sensitive to magnetic fields on the aircraft. Section 6.9 describes how to locate the RSM. Note that
mounting over the cabin can be problematic due to the possibility of passengers using headsets with
magnetic speakers. Exercise the control cables while validating a location. Consider all the magnetic
field variations. A satisfactory RSM location is part of the Final Check Sheet. Use caution when
installing the RSM connector to avoid damaging the connector or wiring.
7. The RSM can be damaged if exposed to a magnet. Do not install the RSM with magnetic tools. Caution:
Some levels have a magnet in them.
8. Structural mounting and lightning direct effects approval for RSM installation on composite, fabric or
aircraft requiring damage tolerance assessment (Certification basis of 14CFR Part 23 amendment 23-
48 or later) aircraft is not included under the AML STC. See Section 6.9.3 for installation inside a
composite or fabric aircraft. Mounting the RSM on a pressure vessel also requires separate structural
approval.
9. Avionics integrations are shown in Section 9. The manufacturers documentation for the integrated
equipment must be used to verify and validate the operation of the integrated equipment.
10. The installer must determine whether the design changes described in this document are compatible
with previously approved modifications.
11. To avoid damage to the equipment, do not place the EFD face down resting on the knobs.
12. The ICA requires installer-supplied wiring diagrams and equipment location information. See Appx. D.
13. Each EFD must be charged before release to the customer. See Section 10.6.19.

The conditions and tests required for TSO approval of the EFD1000/500 System are minimum
performance standards. It is the responsibility of those installing this article either on or within
specific type or class of aircraft to determine that the aircraft installation conditions are within
the TSO standards. TSO articles must have separate approval for installation in an aircraft. The
article may be installed only if performed under 14 CFR Part 43 or the applicable airworthiness
requirements.
This manual contains FAA Approved installation instructions for installation of the Aspen
EFD1000/EFD500 system under the AML STC for use as a primary electronic flight display and
associated Multifunction display(s) (as applicable) during day/night IFR and VFR operations in
those Part 23 Class I and II aircraft (as defined in AC 23.1309-1C) listed on the AML. Installation
of the EFD1000/500 into part 23 Class I or II aircraft not included in the AML, into any part 23
class III or IV aircraft, or into any part 25, 27, or 29 aircraft, or non-U.S. registered aircraft
requires separate airworthiness approval.
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 13
1.1 PART NUMBERS......................................................................................................... 13
1.1.1 Authorized Display Configurations..................................................... 14
1.2 INSTALLATION KIT CONTENTS....................................................................................... 19
1.3 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED EFD1000 PFD............................................... 21
1.4 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES NOT SUPPLIED EFD1000 PFD.................................................... 21
1.5 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED EFD1000 MFD ................................ 22
1.6 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED EFD500 MFD .................................. 22
1.7 MFD DATABASE VERSIONS .......................................................................................... 22
1.8 SPECIAL TOOLS REQUIRED............................................................................................ 23
1.9 VENDOR INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 23
1.10 WARRANTY REGISTRATION........................................................................................... 23
1.11 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE .......................................................................................... 23
1.11.1 Technical Standard Order .................................................................. 23
1.11.2 Software Certification........................................................................ 24
1.11.3 Environmental Compliance ................................................................ 24
1.11.4 Installation Approval ......................................................................... 24
2 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS AND LIMITATIONS..................................................... 25
2.1 EFD1000 PFD AND MFD .......................................................................................... 25
2.1.1 General Specifications ....................................................................... 25
2.1.2 Operational Specifications: ................................................................ 25
2.1.3 I/O Specifications: ............................................................................. 25
2.1.4 Certification Specifications: ............................................................... 25
2.1.5 Outline Drawing: ............................................................................... 26
2.2 EFD500 MFD......................................................................................................... 27
2.2.2 Operational Specifications ................................................................. 27
2.2.3 I/O Specifications.............................................................................. 27
2.2.4 Certification Specifications ................................................................ 27
2.2.5 EFD500 Outline Drawing.................................................................... 28
2.2.6 Design Eye Viewing Envelope............................................................. 28
2.3 REMOTE SENSOR MODULE (RSM): ................................................................................. 29
2.3.5 Outline Drawing: ............................................................................... 30
2.4 CONFIGURATION MODULE (CM) .................................................................................... 30
2.4.5 Outline Drawing................................................................................ 31
2.5 ANALOG CONVERTER UNIT (ACU): ................................................................................ 32
2.5.5 Outline Drawing: ............................................................................... 33
2.6 EBB58 EMERGENCY BACKUP BATTERY ............................................................................ 33
2.6.2 Operating Specifications.................................................................... 33
2.6.3 I/O Specifications.............................................................................. 34
2.6.5 Outline Drawing................................................................................ 34
3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 35
3.1 EFD1000/EFD500 ................................................................................................. 35
3.2 REMOTE SENSOR MODULE (RSM) .................................................................................. 37
3.3 CONFIGURATION MODULE (CM) .................................................................................... 38
3.4 ANALOG CONVERTER UNIT (ACU) ................................................................................. 38
3.5 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE............................................................................................... 39
4 SUPPORTED INSTALLED CONFIGURATIONS............................................................. 41
4.1 SINGLE DISPLAY CONFIGURATIONS ................................................................................. 41
4.1.1 Pilot Configurations........................................................................... 41
4.1.2 Pro Digital Configuration................................................................... 42
4.1.3 Pro Configurations with Autopilot ...................................................... 43
4.1.4 Pro Configuration with Autopilot and Digital/Analog VLOC................. 44
4.1.5 Pro Configuration with Autopilot and Dual Analog VLOC..................... 45
4.2 TWO DISPLAY SYSTEM - PFD WITH EFD1000 OR EFD500 MFD.......................................... 46
4.3 THREE DISPLAY SYSTEM - PFD WITH EFD1000 MFD AND EFD500 MFD............................... 47
5 PRE-MODIFICATION PLANNING............................................................................. 49
5.1 PRE-MODIFICATION CHECKLIST .................................................................................... 50
5.2 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................ 52
5.2.1 Standby Attitude Positioning.............................................................. 57
5.2.2 Standby Airspeed and Altimeter Positioning ....................................... 58
5.2.3 Directional Gyro/ HSI......................................................................... 59
5.2.4 Back Up Nav Indicator........................................................................ 59
5.2.5 GPS Annunciators.............................................................................. 60
5.2.6 Aircraft Power Requirements.............................................................. 60
5.2.7 Equipment Power Requirements......................................................... 61
5.2.8 Special Considerations for Aircraft Limited to VFR .............................. 61
5.3 CONVENTIONAL LANDING GEAR TAIL DRAGGER AIRCRAFT .................................................. 62
5.4 PART 135 IFR OPERATIONS........................................................................................ 62
5.5 SETTING V-SPEED TEXTUAL MARKERS ........................................................................... 62
5.6 OPTIONAL INTERFACES................................................................................................ 62
5.6.1 Autopilot .......................................................................................... 62
5.6.2 GPS Navigator Basemap Compatibility ................................................ 63
5.6.3 GPSS ................................................................................................. 65
5.6.4 GPS/ NAV Switching .......................................................................... 65
5.6.5 Discrete Output................................................................................. 65
5.6.6 Heading Output ................................................................................ 65
5.6.7 Air Data Outputs ............................................................................... 66
5.6.8 Second ACU ...................................................................................... 66
5.6.9 Decision Height................................................................................. 66
5.6.10 RS-232 Considerations (existing PFD installations)............................. 66
5.6.11 Flush or Recess Mounting the PFD ..................................................... 66
5.7 TRAFFIC SENSORS...................................................................................................... 67
5.8 WEATHER INFORMATION.............................................................................................. 67
6 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ................................................................................ 69
6.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT......................................................................... 69
6.2 EQUIPMENT LOCATION DOCUMENTATION......................................................................... 69
6.3 LOG BOOK ENTRY ..................................................................................................... 69
6.4 WEIGHT AND BALANCE................................................................................................ 70
6.5 INSTALLATION LIMITATIONS ......................................................................................... 70
6.5.1 EFD1000 Installation Limitations........................................................ 70
6.5.2 RSM Mounting Limitations ................................................................. 70
6.5.3 EFD1000 MFD RSM Limitations (Dual RSM Mounting)........................ 71
6.6 EQUIPMENT BONDING................................................................................................. 72
6.7 COOLING ................................................................................................................ 73
6.8 EFD INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 73
6.8.1 Connecting the Internal Battery (does not apply to 910-00001-002) .. 73
6.8.2 PFD Mounting Location...................................................................... 73
6.8.3 MFD1000 Mounting Location............................................................. 74
6.8.4 EFD Mounting Bracket Installation...................................................... 75
6.8.5 EFD Bonding Strap............................................................................. 77
6.8.6 Pitot and Static Connections (EFD1000 only) ...................................... 78
6.8.7 Quick Connector Installation.............................................................. 79
6.8.8 Leak Check Requirements.................................................................. 79
6.9 RSM INSTALLATION................................................................................................... 80
6.9.1 Proposed RSM Location Check ........................................................... 84
6.9.2 Pressurized Aircraft........................................................................... 85
6.9.3 RSM mounting on Composite, Fabric or Damage-Tolerant Design Aircraft
86
6.9.4 Second RSM Placement (MFD1000)..................................................... 86
6.9.5 RSM Mounting Angles........................................................................ 87
6.9.6 RSM External Mount Aluminum Skin................................................ 89
6.9.7 RSM Internal Mount ........................................................................... 92
6.9.8 RSM Installation ................................................................................ 92
6.9.9 RSM Shim Fabrication (if necessary) ................................................... 93
6.10 ACU INSTALLATION................................................................................................... 96
6.10.1 ACU Mounting................................................................................... 97
6.11 CONFIGURATION MODULE INSTALLATION......................................................................... 98
6.12 EBB58 EMERGENCY BACKUP BATTERY INSTALLATION........................................................ 100
6.12.1 EBB58 Mounting.............................................................................. 100
7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION..................................................................................103
7.1 ELECTRICAL LOAD ANALYSIS....................................................................................... 103
7.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION......................................................................................... 103
7.2.1 HIRF/Lightning Requirements .......................................................... 105
7.2.2 EFD to GPS/VLOC/ACU Wiring.......................................................... 106
7.2.3 RSM Wiring ..................................................................................... 107
7.2.4 Configuration Module Wiring........................................................... 109
7.2.5 ACU Wiring ..................................................................................... 109
7.2.6 Back Up NAV Indicator Wiring .......................................................... 109
7.2.7 Autopilot Wiring.............................................................................. 109
7.2.8 EBB58 Wiring................................................................................... 109
8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS .................................................................................111
8.1 EFD ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 111
8.1.1 Power Input..................................................................................... 111
8.1.2 Tone (PFD)/Reversion (MFD) Output ................................................. 111
8.1.3 RS-232 GPS Input............................................................................ 111
8.1.4 RS232 ADC Output.......................................................................... 111
8.1.5 ARINC 429 GPS Inputs ..................................................................... 112
8.1.6 ARINC 429 VLOC Input .................................................................... 113
8.1.7 ARINC 429 Output........................................................................... 113
8.2 ACU ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 114
8.2.1 Power Input..................................................................................... 114
8.2.2 Decision Height (DH) Input .............................................................. 114
8.2.3 VLOC Receiver................................................................................. 114
8.2.4 GPS Receiver ................................................................................... 115
8.2.5 Autopilot ........................................................................................ 116
8.2.6 ARINC 429 Output........................................................................... 119
8.3 EFD PIN OUT......................................................................................................... 120
8.4 RSM PIN OUT........................................................................................................ 121
8.5 CONFIGURATION MODULE PIN OUT.............................................................................. 121
8.6 ACU PIN OUT........................................................................................................ 122
9 INSTALLATION WIRING DIAGRAMS........................................................................125
10 CONFIGURATION AND EQUIPMENT CHECKOUT .....................................................167
10.1 POST INSTALLATION WIRING CHECKS ............................................................................ 167
10.1.1 Wiring Verification........................................................................... 167
10.1.2 Bonding Check FAR 23.867(b) ....................................................... 167
10.2 DATABASE INSTALLATION .......................................................................................... 168
10.3 INITIAL SYSTEM TURN ON.......................................................................................... 168
10.4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION........................................................................................... 169
10.4.1 Main Menu Access........................................................................... 169
10.4.2 Menu Navigation ............................................................................. 169
10.4.3 Edit Mode ....................................................................................... 169
10.4.4 Main Menu Configuration ................................................................ 169
10.4.5 INSTALLATION MENU UNIT CONFIGURATION.................................. 170
10.4.6 EFD1000 Installation Menu Configuration ........................................ 172
10.4.7 EFD500 MFD Installation Menu Configuration................................... 179
10.5 RSM CALIBRATION .................................................................................................. 191
10.5.1 Calibration Overview ....................................................................... 191
10.5.2 RSM Calibration Procedure............................................................... 194
10.5.3 Heading Offset Adjustment ............................................................. 197
10.5.4 Heading Accuracy Test .................................................................... 198
10.5.5 Heading Interference Test................................................................ 198
10.6 GROUND TEST PROCEDURE (PFD, EFD500 MFD AND EFD1000 IN PFD REVERSION AND IN MFD MODE)
199
10.6.1 Indicated Airspeed Display .............................................................. 200
10.6.2 Altitude Display............................................................................... 200
10.6.3 System Leak Test ............................................................................ 200
10.6.4 Outside Air Temperature (if ENABLED).............................................. 200
10.6.5 AHRS Sensor Test............................................................................ 200
10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test .............................................................................. 200
10.6.7 NAV Receiver Sensor Test ................................................................ 201
10.6.8 Backup Navigation Indicator ............................................................ 202
10.6.9 Autopilot Sensor Test ...................................................................... 202
10.6.10 Flight Director Test ......................................................................... 203
10.6.11 Sonalert Test................................................................................... 203
10.6.12 Decision Height (DH) Test................................................................ 204
10.6.13 Traffic Display Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD, and EFD1000
MFD) 204
10.6.14 XM Weather Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500
MFD, and EFD1000 MFD)..................................................................................... 204
10.6.15 WX-500 Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD,
and EFD1000 MFD) ............................................................................................. 204
10.6.16 Ancillary Equipment Heading Check................................................. 204
10.6.17 Ancillary Equipment Air Data Check ................................................. 205
10.6.18 EFD Inter-System Communication Test ............................................ 205
10.6.19 EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery Test (if installed) and internal battery tests
205
10.6.20 TAPES Configuration Check ............................................................. 205
10.6.21 EMI Test (test with all EFD units operating) ....................................... 206
10.6.22 Flight Control Interference Check..................................................... 206
10.7 WX-500 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE .................................................................. 207
10.7.1 System Data.................................................................................... 207
10.7.2 Strike Test ...................................................................................... 208
10.7.3 Noise Monitor ................................................................................. 209
10.7.4 Antenna Mount ............................................................................... 210
11 POST INSTALLATION FLIGHT CHECK.....................................................................211
11.1 BASIC ADI FLIGHT CHECKS (PFD AND EFD1000 MFD IN REVERSION) .................................. 211
11.2 BASIC HSI/DG FLIGHT CHECKS (PFD AND EFD1000 MFD IN REVERSION)............................. 211
11.3 ILS FLIGHT CHECKS PFD (EFD1000 MFD AND EFD1000 SECONDARY HSI) ......................... 212
11.4 AUTOPILOT FLIGHT CHECKS (IF INSTALLED, PFD ONLY)...................................................... 212
11.5 DOCUMENT TEST FLIGHT........................................................................................... 213
12 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS..................................................................................215
12.1 PILOT CONTROLS .................................................................................................... 215
12.1.1 Overview......................................................................................... 215
12.1.2 Power Control ................................................................................. 215
12.1.3 PFD Display and Control Layout ....................................................... 217
12.1.4 Control Knobs................................................................................. 218
12.2 TRAFFIC DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) ..................................................................................... 218
12.3 XM WEATHER DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) .............................................................................. 218
12.4 WX-500 DISPLAY (OPTIONAL) ................................................................................... 219
13 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORMS.............................................................221
APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................................................................225
APPENDIX B INSTALLATION FINAL CHECK SHEET ................................................................231
APPENDIX C OPERATOR CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST.........................................................237
APPENDIX D INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS ...........................................241

List of Tables
Table 1.1 - TSO Part Numbers.............................................................................................................. 13
Table 1.2 - Authorized Display Configurations..................................................................................... 14
Table 1.3 - 903-00001-001 or A-08-130-00 EFD1000 Install Kit ....................................................... 19
Table 1.4 903-00004-001 or A-08-149-00 EFD500 Install Kit.......................................................... 20
Table 1.5 - 903-00002-001 or A-08-131-00 RSM Install Kit............................................................... 20
Table 1.6 - 903-00003-001 or A-08-132-00 ACU Install Kit .............................................................. 20
Table 1.7 PFD Accessories Required but Not Supplied........................................................................ 21
Table 1.8 PFD Optional Accessories Not Supplied............................................................................... 21
Table 1.9 - EFD1000 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied.......................................... 22
Table 1.10 - EFD500 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied.......................................... 22
Table 1.11 - MFD Database Versions.................................................................................................... 22
Table 5.1 - PFD Pre-Modification Checklist .......................................................................................... 51
Table 5.2 - MFD Pre-Modification Checklist ......................................................................................... 52
Table 5.3 - GPS Basemap Compatibility................................................................................................ 64
Table 6.1 Component Weights........................................................................................................... 70
Table 7.1 Current Draw ................................................................................................................... 103
Table 8.1 - EFD A429 GPS Input ......................................................................................................... 113
Table 8.2 - EFD A429 VLOC Input ...................................................................................................... 113
Table 8.3 - EFD1000 A429 GPS Output .............................................................................................. 113
Table 8.4 - ACU A429 Output ............................................................................................................ 119
Table 8.5 - PFD/MFD Pin Out ............................................................................................................. 120
Table 8.6 - RSM Pin Out ..................................................................................................................... 121
Table 8.7 - Configuration Module Pin Out .......................................................................................... 121
Table 8.8 - ACU J1 Pin Out................................................................................................................. 122
Table 8.9 - ACU J2 Pin Out................................................................................................................. 123
Table 8.10 - ACU J3 Pin Out............................................................................................................... 124
Table 13.1 - EFD1000 Environmental Qualification Form.................................................................... 221
Table 13.2 - RSM Environmental Qualification Form........................................................................... 222
Table 13.3 - ACU Environmental Qualification Form........................................................................... 223

List of Definitions, Acronyms, Abbreviations

ACU Analog Converter Unit
ADAHRS Air Data Attitude Heading Reference System
ADC Air Data Computer
ADI Attitude Director Indicator
AI Attitude Indicator
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference System
AML Approved Model List
A429 ARINC 429 interface
CM Configuration Module
DG Directional Gyro
DH Decision Height
EBB Emergency Backup Battery
EFD Electronic Flight Display (refers to all versions)
EFD500 EFD500 MFD Flight Display
EFD1000 EFD1000 PFD or EFD1000 MFD
EWR Evolution Weather Receiver
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAR Federal Aviation Regulations
FD Flight Director
GNAV Combined GPS and VOR radio (all A429 interface)
GPS Global Positioning System
GS Glide-slope or Groundspeed
HSI Horizontal Situational Indicator
ICA Instructions for Continued Airworthiness
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
LOC ILS Localizer
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MFD Multi-Function Display (refers to EFD500 MFD or EFD1000 MFD)
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBS Omni-Bearing Selector
PFD Primary Flight Display (refers to EFD1000 PFD only)
RSM Remote Sensor Module
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
TAS True Airspeed
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VLOC The VOR side of a GNAV radio
VOR VHF Omni-directional Ranging
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System

1 Introduction
This Installation Manual contains FAA Approved Data, but only when used to install the Aspen
Avionics EFD1000 and/or EFD500 display systems in accordance with AML STC SA10822SC. This
document contains detailed instructions for installing the EFD1000/500 System into specific
aircraft as listed in the AML-STC. There are regulations that must be complied with to ensure an
airworthy installation. Section 5, Pre-Modification Planning will guide you through these
requirements.

1.1 Part Numbers
List of the major hardware components (by part number) that make up the EFD1000/500
system complying with the standards prescribed in this TSO.
Part Number Description
910-00001-001 EFD1000, Evolution Flight Display, PFD/MFD
910-00001-002 EFD1000, Evolution Flight Display, MFD, for use with EBB58 Emergency
Backup Battery
910-00001-003 EFD500, Evolution Flight Display, MFD
910-00005-004 Configuration Module, Assy
910-00003-001 RSM, Remote Sensor Module, Top Mount w/GPS
910-00003-002 RSM, Remote Sensor Module, Top Mount w/o GPS
910-00003-003 RSM, Remote Sensor Module, Bottom Mount w/o GPS
910-00004-001 ACU, Analog Converter Unit - optional
903-00001-001 EFD1000 Install Kit
903-00004-001 EFD500 Install Kit
903-00002-001 RSM Install Kit
903-00003-001 ACU Install Kit
413-00002-001 EBB58, Emergency Backup Battery
903-00006-001 EBB58 Installation Kit, 7ft cable, mounting tray
Table 1.1 - TSO Part Numbers

1.1.1 Authorized Display Configurations
The following table identifies the only Authorized Display Configurations for software version
2.X equipment. Other combinations are not approved. See Section 5 for Installation
Configurations Authorized by this STC and Figures 1.1 to 1.5 for Authorized System
Components of each Display System. See Aspen Document A-01-126-00 for installation of
software version 1.0 and 1.1 equipment.

System Display Configurations
Single Display EFD1000 PFD Pro
EFD1000 PFD Pilot
Two Display EFD1000 PFD Pro
plus EFD1000 MFD
Two Display EFD1000 PFD Pro
plus EFD500 MFD
Three Display EFD1000 PFD Pro
plus EFD1000 MFD
plus EFD500 MFD
Table 1.2 - Authorized Display Configurations
Note: Standalone MFD installations are not authorized at this time. An MFD must always
be in installed with a PFD Pro.


Figure 1.1 - EFD1000 PFD PRO Authorized System Components


EFD1000 PFD PILOT, TSO
302-00008-( ) SOFTWARE
EFD1000-500 IOP
302-00007-( ) SOFTWARE
EFD1000-500 MAP
910-00001-001 DISPLAY
w/ Internal Battery
910-00005-004 Configuration
Module
300-00001-004 CM IMAGE
PILOT
910-00003-001 RSM
w/GPS, TOP MOUNT
910-00003-002 RSM
w/o GPS, TOP MOUNT
910-00003-003 RSM
w/o GPS, BOTTOM MOUNT
Pick one
RSM

Figure 1.2 EFD1000 PFD PILOT Authorized System Components


Figure 1.3 - EFD1000 MFD Authorized System Components

EFD1000 MFD, TSO
Suitable for replacing standby
Airspeed and Altimeter
302-00008-( ) SOFTWARE
EFD1000-500 IOP
302-00007-( ) SOFTWARE
EFD1000-500 MAP
910-00001-002 DISPLAY
For use with EBB58
910-00005-004 Configuration
Module
300-00001-009 CM IMAGE
EFD1000 MFD
910-00003-001 RSM
w/GPS, TOP MOUNT
910-00003-002 RSM
w/o GPS, TOP MOUNT
910-00003-003 RSM
w/o GPS, BOTTOM MOUNT
Pick one
RSM
413-00002-001 EBB58 Battery
903-00006-001 EBB58 Install Kit

Figure 1.4 - EFD1000 MFD Authorized System Components (Suitable for replacing standby AS/ALT)


Figure 1.5 - EFD500 MFD Authorized System Components

1.2 Installation Kit Contents

Aspen P/N Description Manufacturers P/N or
equivalent
A-08-125-00
403-00002-001
Panel Mounting Bracket Assembly Aspen
A-06-564-00
116-00022-002
44 Pin HD D-Sub connector with contacts Positronics P/N DD44F10000
116-00026-001 EMI Metal Back shell Positronics P/N D25000GE0
A-06-507-00
275-00001-002
Pitot Quick Connector Aspen
A-06-505-00
275-00001-001
Static Quick Connector Aspen
A-08-144-00
412-00004-001
Configuration Module Cable Assembly Aspen
903-00007-001 EFD Recess Mount Installation Kit
(optional use Aspen Service Bulletin
SB2009-03 for installation)
Aspen
Table 1.3 - 903-00001-001 or A-08-130-00 EFD1000 Install Kit

equivalent
A-08-125-00
403-00002-001
Panel Mounting Bracket Assembly Aspen
116-00022-002 44 Pin HD D-Sub connector with contacts Positronics P/N DD44F10000
116-00026-001 EMI Metal Back shell Positronics P/N D25000GE0
A-08-144-00
412-00004-001
Configuration Module Cable Assembly Aspen
Table 1.4 903-00004-001 or A-08-149-00 EFD500 Install Kit
equivalent
A-08-148-00
412-00005-001
RSM 30ft cable assembly w/connector
(optional)
Aspen
201-00004-001 Screw, Machined, Pan, Phillips, Brass,8-
32 11/4, Qty (4) req.
MS35214-47
212-00001-001 Nut, Hex, Locking, Nylon Insert, Brass, 8-
32, Qty (4) req.
MS21044B08
231-00001-001 Washer, Flat, #8, Brass, 11/64 ID, 3/8
OD, Qty (4) req.
NAS1149B0832H
256-00001-001 O-Ring AS568A-120
116-00020-001 Connector, Threaded plug, In-Line, Male
7-pin
Hirose SR30-10PF-7P(71)
Table 1.5 - 903-00002-001 or A-08-131-00 RSM Install Kit
Aspen P/N Description Manufacturers P/N (or
equivalent)
A-06-570-00
116-00014-001
15 pin D-Sub connector AMP P/N 205163-1
A-06-571-00
116-00014-002
A-06-572-00
116-00014-003
A-06-408-00
116-00026-002
DB15 pin EMI Back shell NorComp 970-015-030R121
A-06-409-00
116-00026-003
DB25 EMI Back shell NorComp 970-025-030R121
A-06-410-00
116-00026-005
DB37 EMI Back shell NorComp 970-037-030R121
A-06-574-00
116-00037-001
Crimp Sockets (77) Positronics P/N FC6020D
Table 1.6 - 903-00003-001 or A-08-132-00 ACU Install Kit
1.3 Accessories Required but Not Supplied EFD1000 PFD
Description Manufacturers P/N
Tee Fittings for pitot/static (2 req.) Thogus Products P/N TT-9444 (1/4) or equiv.
1/4 pitot and static tubing Imperial Eastman 44PN or equivalent
Circuit Breaker pull to open (EFD1000) 7.5
amp
MS 26574-7.5 or equivalent
Circuit Breaker (ACU) 2 amp (1 for each ACU) MS26574-2 or equivalent
EFD to GPS/ACU double shielded cable M27500-22TG2V64 or equivalent
Hose Clamps (8 req) Aero Seal 6604 or equivalent
Single stranded 24, 22, 20 AWG MIL-W-22759/16 or equivalent
Shielded Wire 22 AWG MIL-C-27500 or equivalent
EFD Mounting Screws #6-32, 6ea. MS24693-S30 or equivalent
EFD and ACU Mounting Lock Nuts #6-32 MS21044N06 or equivalent
EFD and ACU Mounting Washers NAS1149FN632P or equivalent
ACU mounting Screw #6-32 MS35206-XXX or equivalent
Misc. screws, washers, cable ties, etc. Installer supplied
Table 1.7 PFD Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.4 Optional Accessories Not Supplied EFD1000 PFD
Description Manufacturer
Sonalert (continuous type) Mallory SC648S or equivalent
EFIS Master switch rated for 7.5 amps cont. MS35058-22 or equivalent SPST switch
Circuit Breaker/Switch 7.5amp (optional in
lieu of separate C/B and switch)
Potter Brumfield W31M-7.5 or equivalent
*Over Braid light weight
*Over Braid medium weight
*used in lieu of double shielded wire
Alpha Wire P/N 2142 (1/4), P/N 2146 (1/2)
Daburn P/N 2350-X, X=diameter (i.e., 1/2)
RSM Doubler Installer fabricated per Section 6.9.5
RSM Shim may be required on extreme
mounting angles
Installer fabricated per Section 6.9.9
RSM sealant non-pressure vessel mounting MIL-A-46146, Dow 738 or equiv.
7 conductor shielded cable, for installer
fabricated harness using 116-00020-001
connector.
M27500-A24SD7T23/ M27500-22TG7T14 or
equivalent
Table 1.8 PFD Optional Accessories Not Supplied

1.5 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied EFD1000 MFD
Tee Fittings for pitot/static (2 req) Thogus Products P/N TT-9444
(1/4x1/4x1/4) or equivalent
1/4 pitot and static tubing Imperial Eastman 44PN or equivalent
Hose Clamps (8 req) Aero Seal 6604 or equivalent
MFD Master switch rated for 7.5A
continuous
MS35058-22 or equivalent SPST switch
Circuit Breaker/Switch 7.5A (optional in lieu
of separate C/B and switch)
Potter Brumfield W31M-7.5 or equivalent
See RSM items in Table 1.3 and 1.4
EFD Mounting Screws #6-32, 6ea. MS24693-S30 or equivalent
EFD Mounting Lock Nuts #6-32, 6ea. MS21044N06 or equivalent
EBB Emergency Disconnect Switch Locking
Toggle Switch (used when EBB58 is installed)
MS24658-22D or equivalent SPST switch.
(required for EBB emergency disconnect) See
Section 7.2 for labeling
EBB Emergency Disconnect Switch & Switch
Guard (option to locking toggle switch above)
Switch MS35058-22 or equivalent, SPST
Guard - MS25224-1 or equivalent, capable of
locking in an open position.
Table 1.9 - EFD1000 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.6 Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied EFD500 MFD
MFD Master switch rated for 5A-7.5A cont. MS35058-22 or equivalent SPST switch
Circuit Breaker EFD500 5A 7.5A MS26574-5 or MS26574-7.5 or equiv.
Circuit Breaker/Switch 5A -7.5A (optional in
lieu of separate C/B and switch)
Potter Brumfield W31M-5 or W31M-7.5 or
equivalent
EFD Mounting Screws #6-32, 6ea. MS24693-S30 or equiv.
EFD Mounting Lock Nuts #6-32, 6ea. MS21044N06 or equiv.
Table 1.10 - EFD500 MFD Optional Accessories Required but Not Supplied

1.7 MFD Database Versions
Database Part Number Database Coverage
430-00001-001 Americas - MicroSD Card with Jeppesen Data
430-00001-002 International - MicroSD Card with Jeppesen Data
Table 1.11 - MFD Database Versions
1.8 Special Tools Required
D-SUB connectors:
Hand Crimp Tool: Positronics P/N 9507-0-0-0 or equivalent
Insertion/Extraction Tools: Positronics P/N M81969/1-02 or equivalent -ACU
Positronics P/N M81969/1-01 or equivalent - PFD

1.9 Vendor Information
Aspen Avionics Inc. EDMO Distributors, Inc Wire, Cable, Sonalert
5001 Indian School Road NE 12830E Mirabeau Pkwy
Albuquerque, NM 87110 Spokane Valley, WA 99216
(505) 856-5034 (800) 235-3300
dealersupport@aspenavionics.com info@edmo.com

A.E. Petsche Co. Double Shielded & RSM Cable Jeppesen JSUM Application Help
2112 West Division St. JSUM Jeppesen Services Update Mgr
Arlington, TX 76012-3693 (800) 732-2800
(817) 461-9473 (303) 328-4587
Info@aepetsche.com pctechsupport@jeppesen.com

Positronic Industries Inc. - Crimpers Jeppesen Database Accounts/passwords
423 N. Campbell Ave. -Connectors Customer Service
Springfield, MO 65801 (800) 621-5377
(417) 866-2322 (303) 799-9090
info@connectpositronic.com captain@jeppesen.com

1.10 Warranty Registration
Registration of LRU part numbers and serial numbers must be recorded on the dealer portal of
the Aspen Avionics website at www.aspenavionics.com/dealerramp. Activating the warranty on
the EFD1000/500 system is just one important aspect of providing a satisfying installation
experience for our customers.

1.11 Regulatory Compliance
1.11.1 Technical Standard Order
All components of the EFD1000/500 system are produced under Technical Standard
Order Authorization (TSOA).
1.11.2 Software Certification
The software for the EFD1000/500 system was developed to RTCA DO-178B software
Level C. The RSM GPS receiver software was developed to RTCA DO-178B level E. The
RSM GPS is approved for emergency use only.

1.11.3 Environmental Compliance
All system components meet the categories of RTCA/DO-160E as shown in the
environmental qualification forms in Section 13.

1.11.4 Installation Approval
Installation of the EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD and/or EFD500 MFD is FAA
approved under AML STC SA10822SC. This installation manual contains FAA Approved
Data, but only when used to install the Aspen Avionics EFD1000 and/or EFD500
display systems in accordance with this AML STC. The data in this manual may be
used only by Authorized Aspen Avionics Dealers, and then only to support installation
of the EFD1000 and/or EFD500, either under STC SA10822SC, or as a follow-on field
approval for aircraft not included in the Approved Model List. Use of this data for any
other purpose requires separate written approval from Aspen Avionics Inc.

2 Equipment Specifications and Limitations
2.1 EFD1000 PFD and MFD
2.1.1 General Specifications
Part Number .............................. 910-00001-001, 910-00001-002
Width/Height............................. 3.50 in./7.00 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Can Depth................................. 4.15 in. (Rear of Bezel to Rear of Can)
Overall Depth ............................ 6.35 in. (Knob to Rear Pressure Fitting)
Weight....................................... 2.9 lbs with bracket (-002 part number is 2.1 lbs)
Display Type.............................. 6.0 in. Diagonal TFT Active Matrix LCD (400x760)
Display Colors ........................... 32,768
Face .......................................... Anti-Reflective Coated Glass
Backlight ................................... High Intensity White LED
Rotary Knobs............................. Optical Encoder with Momentary Push
Dimming ................................... Manual & Automatic (Front Bezel Mounted Sensor)

2.1.2 Operational Specifications:
Operating Temp: ...................... -20C to +55C
Storage Temp: .......................... -55C to +85C
Max Operating Altitude.............. 35,000 ft Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft Pressurized
Cooling ..................................... Integral Fan
Max Humidity............................ 95% at 50C
Input Voltage............................. +9 to +32 VDC (Note: Input power must transition
>11VDC to turn on the unit)
Nominal Current ........................ 2.4/4.8 Amps (28v/14v)

2.1.3 I/O Specifications:
ARINC 429 Inputs ...................... 5 Low/High Speed
ARINC 429 Outputs ................... 1 Low Speed
RS-232 Inputs ........................... 5
RS-232 Outputs ........................ 3
Pitot / Static .............................. Quick Connect

2.1.4 Certification Specifications:
Technical Standard Order (EFD1000):
TSO-C2d .................................. Airspeed Instruments
TSO-C3d .................................. Turn and Slip Instrument
TSO-C4c .................................. Bank and Pitch Instruments
TSO-C6d .................................. Direction Instrument Magnetic (Gyroscopically
Stabilized)
TSO-C8d .................................. Vertical Velocity Instrument (Rate-of-Climb)
TSO-C10b ................................ Altitude Pressure Activated Sensitive Type
TSO-C106 ................................ Air Data Computer
TSOC113 ................................ Airborne Multipurpose Electronic Display

Software:
RTCA DO-178B ......................... Level C
Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E.......................... See Environmental Qualification Form Section 13

2.1.5 Outline Drawing:

Figure 2.1 EFD1000 Outline Drawing (inches)
Not shown: The EFD1000 -002 variant with D-connector for the EBB

2.2 EFD500 MFD
Part Number ........................ 910-00001-003
Width .................................. 3.50 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Height ................................. 7.00 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Can Depth........................... 4.15 in. (Rear of Bezel to Rear of Can)
Overall Depth ...................... 5.70 in. (Knob to Rear of Can)
Weight................................. 2.4 lbs with bracket
Display Type........................ 6.0 in. Diagonal TFT Active Matrix LCD (400x760)
Display Colors ..................... 32,768
Face .................................... Anti-Reflective Coated Glass
Backlight ............................. High Intensity White LED
Rotary Knobs....................... Optical Encoder with Momentary Push
Dimming ............................. Manual & Automatic (Front Bezel Mounted Sensor)

2.2.2 Operational Specifications
Operating Temp: ................ -20C to +55C
Storage Temp: .................... -55C to +85C
Max Operating Altitude........ 35,000 ft Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft Pressurized
Cooling ............................... Integral Fan
Max Humidity...................... 95% at 50C
Input Voltage....................... +9 to +32 Volts DC (Note: Input power must
transition >11VDC to turn on the unit)
Nominal Current.................. 0.8/1.6 Amps (28v/14v)

2.2.3 I/O Specifications
ARINC 429 Inputs ................ 5 Low/High Speed
ARINC 429 Outputs ............. 1 Low Speed
RS-232 Inputs ..................... 5
RS-232 Outputs .................. 3
Pitot / Static ........................ N/A

2.2.4 Certification Specifications
Technical Standard Order:
TSOC113 .......................... Airborne Multipurpose Electronic Display
Software: RTCA DO-178B Level C
Environmental: RTCA DO-160E See Environmental Qualification
Form Section 13

2.2.5 EFD500 Outline Drawing

Figure 2.2 EFD500 Outline Drawing (inches)

2.2.6 Design Eye Viewing Envelope
The following information defines the viewing envelope within which the EFD1000 and
EFD500 comply with the equipment standards:
Minimum and maximum distance from the center of the EFD display surface:
10 inches (25.4 cm) minimum to 45 inches (114.3 cm) maximum
Total viewing angles:
From -30 to +30 (left/right), and +30 to -30 (top/bottom) perpendicular to the
EFD front glass surface.

2.3 Remote Sensor Module (RSM):
There are three versions of the Remote Sensor Module. One is designed for top mounting
and contains the emergency GPS, the second is also designed for top or internal mounting
and does not include the emergency GPS. The third version is designed for bottom or
internal mounting and does not include the emergency GPS.
Part Number .............................. A-05-111-00 or 910-00003-001 (RSM with GPS)
................................................. 910-00003-002, (RSM, top mount, no GPS)
................................................. 910-00003-003 (RSM, bottom mount, no GPS)
Width ........................................ 2.65 in. (Measured at Base)
Height ....................................... 1.00 in. (Measured from Base)
Length....................................... 4.40 in. (Front to Rear)
Weight....................................... 0.2 lbs

Operating Temp ....................... -55C to +70C
Storage Temp ........................... -55C to +85C
Max Operating Altitude.............. 55,000 ft Unpressurized
Cooling ..................................... None Required
Max Humidity............................ 95% at 50C
Input Voltage............................. Provided by EFD
Nominal Current ........................ Included in EFD Current

Magnetometer ........................... Proprietary Digital
OAT........................................... Proprietary Digital
GPS ........................................... Proprietary Digital

The RSM is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

Software:
RTCA DO-178B ......................... Level E
Environmental:

Figure 2.3 - RSM Outline Drawing (inches)

2.4 Configuration Module (CM)
For EFD1000/500 systems using Software Version 2.X, there is a single hardware part
number Configuration Module, which is then loaded with the appropriate configuration
settings image file that established the functionality and feature set of the attached
EFD1000 or EFD500 system.
Part Number .............................. A-05-114-00 (Original CM for Pro)
................................................. A-05-113-00 (Original CM for Pilot)
................................................. 910-00005-004 (common CM for Version 2.X
software)
Width ........................................ 1.0 in.
Height ....................................... 0.55 in.
Length....................................... 1.85 in.
Weight....................................... 0.1 lbs
Max Operating Altitude.............. 35,000 ft Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft Pressurized
Cooling ..................................... none required
Max Humidity............................ 95% at 50C
Input Voltage............................. Provided by EFD
Nominal Current ........................ Included in EFD Current

Proprietary digital

The Configuration Module is certified as a component of the EFD1000/500 system

Environmental:

2.4.5 Outline Drawing

Figure 2.4 - Configuration Module Outline Drawing (inches)

2.5 Analog Converter Unit (ACU):
Part Number .............................. A-05-112-00, 910-00004-001 (These part
numbers are equivalent)
Width ........................................ 5.75 in. including mounting flanges
Height ....................................... 1.60 in.
Length....................................... 4.30 in.
Weight....................................... 0.8 lbs

Max Operating Altitude.............. 35,000 ft
Cooling ..................................... none required
Max Humidity............................ 95% at 50C
Input Voltage............................. +11 to +32 VDC
Nominal Current ........................ 0.5/1.0 Amps (28v/14v)

ARINC 429 Inputs ...................... 2 Low Speed
ARINC 429 Outputs ................... 2 Low Speed
RS-232 Inputs ........................... 1 (software loading only)
VHF Nav Receiver....................... 1 Analog input
GPS Receiver.............................. 1 Analog input
GPS OBS Interface ...................... 1 Output
GPS Discrete.............................. 4 Active low inputs
DH Discrete ............................... 1 Active low input
Flight Director ........................... 1 input port
Autopilot Interface..................... 1 Analog port

The ACU is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

Environmental:


Figure 2.5 - ACU Outline Drawing (inches)

2.6 EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery
The EBB58 can only be installed with an EFD1000 MFD.
Part Number .............................. 413-00002-001
Width ........................................ 3.6 in. (widest point on mounting clips)
Height ....................................... 1.7 in.
Length....................................... 8.52 in. (rear of mounting tray to connector)
Weight....................................... 2.25 lbs (includes bracket)

2.6.2 Operating Specifications
Max Operating Altitude ............. 35,000 ft Unpressurized/ 55,000 ft Pressurized
Cooling..................................... None required
Max Humidity............................ 95% at 50C
Input Voltage ............................ Powered by EFD1000
Nominal Current ....................... Powered by EFD1000

2.6.3 I/O Specifications
Proprietary
The EBB58 is certified as a component of the EFD1000 system

Environmental:
RTCA DO-160E.......................... Contained within the EFD1000 Environmental
Qualification Form. See Section 13

2.6.5 Outline Drawing

Figure 2.6 EBB58 Outline Drawing (inches)
3 System Description
The Aspen Avionics EFD1000 and EFD500 systems are multi-purpose displays. The EFD1000
contains an internal ADAHRS that is used to provide attitude, heading and air data for the display.
The EFD500 is a variant of the EFD1000 and does not contain the internal ADAHRS. The EFD1000
and the EFD500 come standard with an internal battery to provide a nominal 30 minute operation
in the event of power loss. These batteries are not designed to provide 30 minute operation under
all foreseeable operating conditions, such as extreme cold temperatures where battery operation is
not assured. An optional Emergency Backup Battery (EBB) is available that will provide at least 30
minutes of operation under all foreseeable operating conditions. Typical EBB endurance at 25 deg
C will exceed two hours when the battery is fully charged. When a PFD is installed, and the
Emergency Backup Battery is connected to an EFD1000 MFD, the legacy standby altimeter and
airspeed indicators may be removed from the aircraft.
Additional equipment is normally installed in support of the displays, including the Remote Sensor
Module (RSM), Configuration Module (CM), optional Emergency Backup Battery (as noted above)
and optional Analog Converter Unit (ACU). Several external sensors can optionally be connected to
the displays, including GPS systems, the Aspen EWR50 XM weather receiver, WX-500 Stormscope,
GTX330 and certain other ARINC 735A protocol TAS and TCAS I systems.
The EFD1000 system can be configured as a PFD or MFD. In the PFD configuration, the EFD1000
provides display of attitude, airspeed, altitude, direction of flight, vertical speed, turn rate, and
turn quality. The system can provide display of navigation information, pilot-selectable indices
(bugs), and annunciations to increase situational awareness and enhance flight safety.
The Pro and Pilot configuration are available in software version 2.1. The Pro System can
display WX-500 data, XM datalink weather products and traffic information from ARINC 735
compatible traffic systems. The Pilot System provides a moving map; however it does not provide
an HSI or second GPS navigation.
The EFD1000 can also be purchased in a multi-function display configuration with reversion
capability to a Primary Flight Display. The EFD500 is a variant of the EFD family that does not
include an ADAHRS. The EFD500 may only be purchased in a multi-function display configuration,
and does not include reversion capability.

3.1 EFD1000/EFD500
The EFD1000/EFD500 are digital systems that consists of a high resolution 6 diagonal color
LCD display, user controls, photocell and Micro SD data card slot. The rear portion of the
EFD1000 includes a non-removable electronics module which contains a full air data
computer, attitude heading reference system, power supplies, backup battery, and dual
processor electronics. Also on the rear of the unit, a fan is provided to cool the backlight and
electronics. The EFD500 does not contain an air data computer or attitude heading reference
system.
The EFD1000/500 mounts to the front surface of most instrument panels. The electronics
module and cooling fins on the back are sized to fit into existing instrument panel holes. A
recess-mount bracket is available to mount the displays nearly flush with the instrument
panel.
The mechanical design allows the instrument to be installed in a vertically oriented pair of
instrument openings, without interfering with the surrounding instruments. The installation
requires minimal mechanical modifications to most general aviation aircraft instrument
panels.
The EFD1000 and EFD500 contain a microSD card port and reader at the bottom of the display
bezel. When authorized, software updates and system upgrades can be installed using the
card port. The port is also used for database information in the EFD1000 MFD and EFD500
MFD.

Figure 3.1 EFD1000 in a PFD view

The EFD1000 is a digital system and supports both ARINC 429 and RS-232 digital interfaces.
In installations with a modern digital radio installation, the PFD connects directly to the
interfaced equipment.
In installations that require interfaces to analog avionics (i.e., older VLOC navigation radios
and autopilots) an ACU is required to digitize the analog signals into ARINC 429 for the PFD.
The EFD1000 and EFD500 can be installed in the following configurations:
EFD1000 configured as a PFD Pro or Pilot
PFD Pro plus EFD1000 configured as an MFD
PFD Pro plus EFD500 configured as an MFD
PFD Pro plus EFD1000 and EFD500, each configured as MFDs

The MFDs are connected to the PFD and each other via an RS-232 digital cross-
communications bus.

NOTE: Version 1.X PFD is not compatible with the Version 2.X MFD. To be used in a multi-
display configuration, the PFD must be upgraded to Version 2.X.

3.2 Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
The RSM is required for each EFD1000 and connects directly to the display. It physically
resembles a traditional GPS antenna and follows the industry standard mounting hole pattern.
The RSM contains all of the sensors that must be remotely located from the PFD display unit.
Certain versions of the RSM can be installed on the underside of the aircraft or internally.
The RSM is powered by the PFD through a shielded wire harness and contains the following
sub-systems:
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) sensor
Emergency backup GPS (RSM GPS version)
Magnetic flux sensors

All RSM versions must be mounted in a magnetically quiet environment. The emergency GPS
version of the RSM is mounted in an area that will provide acceptable reception for the integral
GPS antenna. The versions that do not have GPS can be mounted internally to the fuselage or
wing structure, or in the case of the bottom-mount RSM, on the underside of the aircraft.
Internally mounting the RSM requires disabling of the OAT on the associated EFD. This will
also disable TAS and calculated winds for the associated PFD display.
There are three versions of RSM:
Top Mount with Emergency Backup GPS
Top Mount without Emergency Backup GPS
Bottom Mount without Emergency Backup GPS
CAUTION: Do not mount an RSM made for inverted operation on the top of the aircraft as
reverse magnetic sensing will result, producing unacceptable AHRS performance.
3.3 Configuration Module (CM)
The Configuration Module retains system configuration settings and calibration data. The
Configuration Module connects to the EFD1000/500 through a short fabricated harness and is
fastened to the main wiring bundle of the display.
Each display has an associated Configuration Module that retains that displays aircraft
specific configuration, calibration data and user settings. This scheme permits the display
hardware to be replaced without re-entering the installation settings or re-calibrating the EFD.
3.4 Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
The optional Analog Converter Unit (ACU) provides compatibility with older, analog-based
avionics when required. The ACU converts and concentrates multiple analog interfaces to
digital signals supported by the EFD1000. Control parameters, such as desired heading and
selected course, are also sent from the PFD to the ACU for conversion to analog format for
autopilot support.
The feature set of the Pilot system does not support interface to navigation equipment, and
therefore does not support the ACU interface. The ACU is required when any of the following
capabilities are required in a Pro installation:
Interface to supported autopilots
Interface to supported non-ARINC 429 VLOC navigation radios
Interface to supported non-ARINC 429 GPS navigators
Interface to supported radar altimeter decision height (discrete)

If digital radios (i.e., Garmin 4XX/5XX series radios) are equipped in the aircraft and no other
aircraft interfaces are to be used, then the ACU is not required.
3.5 System Architecture
The system architecture in Figure 3.2 shows the relationships of a single EFD1000 with its
associated RSM, Configuration Module and ACU. The EFD500 is identical to the EFD1000 but
without the pitot/static, RSM, autopilot, tone generator, and DH connections.

EFD-1000 PFD
(Primary Flight Display)
Existing Aircraft Pitot Line
P
i
t
o
t
Existing Aircraft Static Line
S
t
a
t
ic
Digital VLOC/GPS
Sources
ARINC 429
SPI
Discrete
I2C
Analog
Converter Unit
(ACU)
Analog NAV Sources
AutoPilot
Configuration Module
Remote Sensor
Module (RSM)
Optional
Tone Generator
RS-232
Legacy GPS RS-232
Aircraft Power
Radar Altimeter
Digital GPS/VLOC (Optional)
Analog GPS/ VLOC via ACU (Optional) WX-500
EWR50
XM Weather
Traffic
ARINC 429
RS-232
RS-232

Figure 3.2 - EFD1000 Single PFD System Architecture
NOTE: The ARINC 429 data bus between the ACU and the EFD1000 contain proprietary
data labels. Connecting other systems to this bus is not authorized as the other systems
may incorrectly decode the data.


THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4 Supported Installed Configurations
4.1 Single Display Configurations
The following diagrams show the different options for integrating the PFD and MFD with
existing avionics in the installed fleet. Most common digital VLOC radios (such as the Garmin
4xx/5xx series), and analog VLOC radios are supported. The following diagrams show
common installation configurations, but do not represent all possible combinations.

4.1.1 Pilot Configurations
The following configurations show a basic Pilot installation. The Pilot model does not
support the display of VLOC or GPS navigation deviation, only the GPS flight plan and
position is received and displayed. The Pilot model does not support the ACU and
therefore autopilot interfaces are not available.

Figure 4.1 - Pilot Configurations
4.1.2 Pro Digital Configuration
The following configuration shows a Pro Digital installation, without an advanced
autopilot and flight director. No ACU is required for this installation. This installation
would be used when there is no analog VLOC receiver and the autopilot L/R input is
dedicated to the GPS. The PFD navigation source selection has no control over the
autopilot input. Dual digital radios may also be connected with or without a Tracker
autopilot.

Tracker autopilots that use L/R steering can also be wired to an ACU so that the PFD
displayed navigation source L/R output is switched to the autopilot. These
installations are connected as shown in Figure 4.3.

Figure 4.2 Pro Digital Configuration
4.1.3 Pro Configurations with Autopilot
The following configurations show Pro installations with autopilot integration, but
without analog VLOC interfaces. A backup means of navigation is required in single
display installations where there is no integral CDI or moving map display on the GPS
receiver or VLOC receiver. There must be one means of navigation available to the
pilot in the event of a PFD or ACU failure.

Figure 4.3 Pro Configurations with Autopilot
4.1.4 Pro Configuration with Autopilot and Digital/Analog VLOC
The following configuration shows a Pro installation with autopilot integration, a single
digital VLOC/GPS, a single analog VLOC, and a single RS-232/ analog GPS. A backup
Navigation indicator is required in single-display installations where there is no
integral CDI or moving map display on the GPS receiver or VLOC receiver. There must
be one means of navigation available to the pilot in the event of a PFD or ACU failure.

Figure 4.4 - Pro Configuration with AP and VLOC

4.1.5 Pro Configuration with Autopilot and Dual Analog VLOC
The following configuration shows a Pro installation with autopilot integration and dual
analog VLOC interfaces. Two ACUs are required for this installation. A backup means
of navigation is required in single-display installations where there is no integral CDI
or moving map display on the GPS receiver or VLOC receiver. There must be one
means of navigation available to the pilot in the event of a PFD or ACU failure.

Figure 4.5 - Pro Configuration with AP and Dual VLOC

4.2 Two Display System - PFD with EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD
The following configuration shows an EFD1000 PFD Pro and an EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD
interfaced with optional traffic, XM weather, and the WX-500 Stormscope. Any combination of
these sensors may be connected as well as the required RS-232 or ARINC 429 connections
from a GPS receiver and or VLOC receiver for navigation, flight plan and moving map. The
MFD1000 supports the reversion of PFD functions in the event of a PFD failure. The EFD1000
MFD with Emergency Backup Battery authorizes removal of legacy standby indicators for
airspeed and altitude.

P
i
t
o
t
S
t
a
t
i
c
4
2
9

R
X
1
4
2
9

R
X
2
4
2
9

R
X
3
4
2
9

R
X
4
4
2
9

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
2
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
0
4
2
9

T
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
4
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
2
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
0
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

O
u
t
4
2
9

R
X
1
4
2
9

R
X
2
4
2
9

R
X
3
4
2
9

R
X
4
4
2
9

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
2
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
0
4
2
9

T
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
2
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
0
D
i
g
i
t
a
l

O
u
t
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
1

Figure 4.6 - Two Display System PFD/MFD
4.3 Three Display System - PFD with EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD
The following configuration shows an EFD1000 PFD Pro, an EFD1000 MFD, and an EFD500
MFD interfaced with optional traffic, XM weather, and the WX-500 Stormscope. Any
combination of these sensors may be connected as well as the required RS-232 or ARINC 429
connections from a GPS receiver and or VLOC receiver for navigation, flight plan and moving
map. The EFD1000 MFD supports the reversion of PFD functions in the event of a PFD failure.
The EFD1000 MFD with Emergency Backup Battery in this configuration authorizes removal of
legacy standby indicators for airspeed and altitude.

P
i t
o
t
S
t
a
t
ic
P
i t
o
t
S
t
a
t
ic
4
2
9

R
X
1
4
2
9

R
X
2
4
2
9

R
X
3
4
2
9

R
X
4
4
2
9

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
0
4
2
9

T
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
4
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
2
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
0
D
ig
it
a
l
O
u
t
4
2
9

R
X
1
4
2
9

R
X
2
4
2
9

R
X
3
4
2
9

R
X
4
4
2
9

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
0
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
4
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
2
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
0
D
ig
it
a
l
O
u
t
4
2
9

R
X
1
4
2
9

R
X
2
4
2
9

R
X
3
4
2
9

R
X
4
4
2
9

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
3
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
4
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
5
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
2
D
ig
it
a
l
O
u
t
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

R
X
1
R
S
2
3
2

T
X
1

Figure 4.7 - Three Display System PFD/MFD1000/MFD500


5 Pre-Modification Planning
General Limitations
NOTE: The installer must provide the aircraft operator with copies of wiring diagrams (copy
from Section 9 or draft ones not shown) and equipment locations (completed Figure
D1 in the ICAs) that are suitable for system troubleshooting.
This section contains requirements that must be considered before installing the
EFD1000/EFD500 systems. The EFD1000 MFD with the Emergency Backup Battery (must be
installed with an EFD1000 PFD) can be used to replace the standby airspeed and altimeter. There
are important limitations. See below. A standby attitude indicator is always required in
accordance with 14CFR 23.1311, except for aircraft limited to VFR. See Section 5.2.8.
The following are authorized configurations. Other configurations, such as stand alone MFD
installations, are not authorized at this time:
Single EFD1000 PFD
Requires:
Standby Attitude indicator
Standby Altimeter
Standby Airspeed indicator
Magnetic Direction Indicator (compass)
Secondary navigation indicator (when required see section 5.2.4)

EFD 1000 PFD and EFD500 MFD
Requires:
Standby Altimeter
Standby Airspeed
A GPS is required for an EFD500 installation

EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD, or
EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD
Requires:
Standby Altimeter
Standby Airspeed
IFR GPS connected to each EFD1000 display
Alternate Static Source

The mechanical standby altimeter and airspeed indicator can be replaced by the EFD1000 MFD
when the Emergency Backup Battery is installed with the EFD1000.

EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD with Emergency Backup Battery, or
EFD1000 PFD and EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 MFD with Emergency Backup Battery
Requires:
Standby Mechanical*Attitude indicator
IFR GPS connected to each EFD1000 display
Alternate Static Source
Emergency Backup Battery with adequate level of charge, checked before each departure
Instrument Panel Placard installed reading EMER BAT DISPATCH LIMIT 80% - SEE EFD AFMS
*Note: This configuration has been FAA approved under an Equivalent Level of Safety and
requires a mechanical standby attitude indicator.

Important Limitations associated with backup airspeed and altitude instruments:
Your customer must be aware of the limitations associated with replacing the backup altimeter
and airspeed indicator. When the EFD1000 MFD with Emergency Backup Battery is used as the
backup, the reliability of the aircraft electrical system drives the requirement for a backup battery
charge level that will permit operation for at least 30 minutes, even in cold temperatures. This
means the Emergency Backup Battery state of charge must be checked before flight, and if the
state of charge is less than the percentage prescribed in the AFMS, takeoff is prohibited until the
charge level is adequate.
The EBB58 may only be installed in a multiple display configuration and may only be connected
to the EFD1000 MFD. No other connections are permitted.

5.1 Pre-Modification Checklist
Complete Table 5.1 and Table 5.2 (if installing MFD) to insure that the aircraft to be modified
is a suitable candidate for installation of the EFD1000 PFD/MFD system(s) using this AML-STC.
It is required to have a PASS or NA for all rows in order to use this AML-STC as the
certification basis for the EFD1000 installation. NA means Not Applicable because no
interface is made to that device. Only Items designated with NA if no ____ may use NA in
the PASS column.
PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - PFD
ITEM CRITERIA PASS
1 Is the aircraft to be modified on the Approved Model List (AML)?
2 Does aircraft have sufficient electrical capacity to supply all required equipment
given the current draw in Table 7.1?

3 Is there an acceptable location to mount or relocate the required standby
instruments in the pilots field of view? (see Figures 5.3 and 5.4) See the

PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY - PFD
ITEM CRITERIA PASS
beginning of this section to determine the required standby instruments.
4 Do the standby instruments meet the requirements of Figure 5.1 and 5.2?
5 Is there acceptable clearance between the control column (yoke or stick) and the
PFD when the flight controls are in the full nose down position.

6 If removing an EFIS system - does the EFD1000 replace all required
instrumentation previously displayed on the removed EFIS? - NA if no EFIS

7 Is a backup navigation indicator required (see section 5.2.4) - NA if no Backup
NAV indicator is required. If a backup indicator is required, is there an acceptable
location to mount or relocate a required backup NAV Indicator in the pilots field
of view? (see Figure 5.4)

8 Is there an acceptable location to mount the RSM? (see Section 6.9)
9 Is there a location to mount the necessary circuit breakers that will be accessible
to the pilot while seated?

10 Are there suitable locations to mount the necessary switches that are accessible
to the pilot while seated? NA if not installed.

11 Does the aircraft have a compatible GPS receiver or will one be installed? (see
Electrical Interface Section 8 to determine compatibility) - NA if no GPS interface.

12 Does the aircraft have a compatible Navigation receiver or will one be installed?
(see Electrical Interface Section 8 to determine compatibility) - NA if no NAV
interface.

13 If the aircraft is equipped with an autopilot is the Autopilot compatible? (see
Electrical Interface Section 8 to determine compatibility) - NA if no autopilot
interface.

14 If the aircraft is limited to VFR, is there a placard or equivalent acceptable means,
stating Operation of This Aircraft is Limited to VFR Only, or similar phraseology
acceptable to the FAA, as required by 23.1525, 23.1559 and 91.9. Since
the kinds of operations are limited to VFR, this placard or equivalent acceptable
means should already be in place, but should be verified.

Table 5.1 - PFD Pre-Modification Checklist

MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - MFD
ITEM CRITERIA PASS
1.
If an EFD1000 MFD is installed and the standby airspeed and/or altimeter are to be
removed, is there an acceptable location to mount the required EBB58 Emergency
Backup Battery? NA if no backup instruments removed.

2.
If an EFD1000 MFD is installed, does the aircraft have an IFR GPS installed? NA if
EFD1000 MFD not installed.

3.
If an EFD1000 MFD is installed, does the aircraft have an alternate static source?
4.
Does the aircraft have a standby attitude indicator in the pilots primary maximum field
of view (See Figure 5.3)?

5.
If the standby airspeed indicator and altimeter are to be removed, is there an
acceptable location to mount the required placard reading EMER BAT DISPATCH LIMIT
80% - SEE EFD AFMS? NA if EBB not required to be installed.

6.
Is there an acceptable location to mount and label the EBB emergency disconnect
MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY - MFD
ITEM CRITERIA PASS
switch? NA if EBB not required to be installed.
7.
Does aircraft have sufficient electrical capacity to supply all required equipment given
the current draw in Table 7.1?

8.
Is there an acceptable location to mount or relocate the required standby airspeed and
altitude instruments, collocated with the standby attitude indicator, all within the pilots
primary maximum field of view? (see Figure 5.3 and 5.4)

9.
Do the standby instruments meet the requirements of Figure 5.1 and 5.2?
10.
Is there acceptable clearance between the control column (yoke or stick) and the MFD(s)
when the flight controls are in the full nose down position?

11.
Is there an acceptable location to mount the EFD1000 MFD RSM? (see Section 6) - NA if
EFD500 only installation

12.
Is there a location to mount the MFD circuit breaker(s) that will be accessible to the
pilot while seated?

13.
Is there a location to mount the MFD switch(s) that is accessible to the pilot while
seated?

Table 5.2 - MFD Pre-Modification Checklist
5.2 Limitations
Software Version
Multiple display configurations must use EFD1000/500 MAP and IOP software version 2.0, or
later FAA approved version. All displays in a multi-display arrangement must be at the same
software revision level.
General Standby Instrument Requirements
FAR 23.1311(a)(5) requires that independent secondary instruments be installed (existing
units may be relocated) for Attitude, Altitude, Airspeed, and magnetic direction indicator
whisky compass when an Electronic Display (i.e., EFD1000) is used as the primary
instrument. These instruments are collectively and individually referred to as standby
instruments throughout this document.
IFR certificated Part 23 aircraft that do not have an existing attitude Indicator must install a
standby attitude indicator along with the PFD as required by FAR 23.1311(a)(5).
In accordance with FAA Policy, the secondary attitude indicator requirement of FAR 23.1311
(a)(5) does not always apply to aircraft limited to VFR. See Section 5.2.8, Special
Considerations for Aircraft Limited to VFR.
The existing outside air temperature probe (if installed) and magnetic direction indicator
whisky compass may not be removed during the installation of the EFD1000 system.
The 30 minute, internal battery in the PFD is not approved for use as a power source to meet
the electrical power source requirement under 14 CFR 23.1353, or for single engine Part 135
IFR operations under 14 CFR 135.163.

Pneumatic Standby Instruments (See Figure 5.1)
Aircraft with existing pneumatic attitude, altitude, and airspeed instruments may relocate
them as necessary as described in Section 5.2.1. The standby pneumatic airspeed and
altimeter should be connected to an independent pitot and static line (independent from PFD)
whenever available.

Electric Standby Instruments
Aircraft that are all electric must keep the EFD1000 PFD on an independent power source from
the standby instruments as determined from the flow chart of Figure 5.1. The installer must
verify that the standby instruments are electrically isolated from the PFD through either of the
following two methods:
A) Standby instruments are powered by a dedicated standby battery, separate from the
aircraft starter battery, which meets the requirements of FAR 23.1353(h). [Note: The
EFD1000 PFD internal battery does not qualify as an independent battery under FAR
23.1353(h)].
B) Dual independent electrical systems (dual alternators and dual batteries) with the PFD
on one system and the standby instruments on the other system.
The standby, electric attitude indicator must not rely on pitot/static inputs for its operation.
Removal of pneumatic standby instruments and installation of electric standby instruments
(other than the MFD1000) is not authorized by this STC. Separate installation approval would
be required.
The installation of dual independent electrical systems or a standby (emergency) aircraft
battery is not authorized by this STC. Separate installation approval would be required. The
EBB is authorized by this STC.

Using EFD1000 MFD as Standby Airspeed and/or Altimeter (see Figure 5.2)
The EFD1000 MFD may be used as the required standby airspeed and/or altimeter. If being
used as the required standby instrument then the EFD1000 MFD must be connected to the
EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery. The placard must be located near the EFD1000 MFD within
the pilots maximum field of view (see figure 5.3). The placard must be in black and white
(white letters on black background or black letters on white background) in a font no smaller
than other placards in the aircraft which reads as follows:

The placard requires the EBB58 battery capacity to be verified prior to each flight.
If the aircraft has dual independent electrical systems then the PFD must be installed on one
bus and the EFD1000 MFD must be installed on the other independent bus. If independent
buses do not exist then the PFD and MFD are to be installed on the aircrafts battery bus or
essential bus.
If the aircraft has dual independent pitot/static systems then the PFD must be installed on one
system and the EFD1000 MFD must be installed on the other independent pitot/static system.
Some altimeters have outputs for Baro set and encoded altitude to an autopilot pre-selector,
transponder, traffic system, or other ancillary equipment. Verify no functions are being
eliminated that cannot be replaced from another source (i.e., blind encoder, etc.) prior to
removal of existing altimeter from aircraft.
NOTE: It is advisable to keep standby instruments when space permits

Figure 5.1 Standby Instrument Power Requirements

Figure 5.2 - MFD1000 as Standby Airspeed and/or Altimeter
5.2.1 Standby Attitude Positioning
The Attitude indicator must be relocated to a position within the pilots primary
maximum field of view in accordance with FAR 23.1321(a). The requirements are 35
degrees from the pilots center line horizontally ( 21 inches from centerline as
defined by AC23-1311-1b) to an area just below the basic T configuration to the glare
shield vertically (see Figure 5.3 below). It is recommended that the Standby
instruments be mounted in the instrument panel immediately adjacent to the
EFD1000/500 displays, but in no case may they be mounted outside the 35 field of
view requirement.

NOTE: The standby instruments may be 2 inch instruments if they meet the placement
requirements (installed under separate approval).

NOTE: The standby instruments must be collocated with each other. One standby
instrument cannot be 21 inches to the left of centerline and another 21
inches right of centerline. They must all be in the same region of the
panel.

Figure 5.3 Standby Instrument Placement

Also note that some attitude indicators (i.e., KI-256) are the primary pitch and roll
reference for the autopilot and must remain in the aircraft but may be copilot or blind
mounted provided a separate standby attitude indicator is installed in accordance with
this section. For rate based autopilots the Turn and Bank Indicator will need to remain
in the aircraft, and may be relocated to the copilot side or blind mounted provided it is
not used as the autopilot mode controller. If used as the autopilot mode controller
then it must be located where it can be easily reached by the pilot while seated.
5.2.2 Standby Airspeed and Altimeter Positioning
The airspeed indicator and altimeter must be within the pilots primary maximum field
of view in accordance with FAR 23.1321(a). The requirements are +/- 35 degrees from
the pilots center line horizontally (+/- 21 inches from centerline as defined by
AC23.1311-1b), see Figure 5.4.

Single Display Configuration
In a single PFD installation the existing airspeed indicator and altimeter may remain in
their original location. However, if the original location does not satisfy the basic T
configuration per FAR 23.1321(d) it is required to LOCK the airspeed and altitude
tape in the PFD to ON via the installation menu. Therefore if the airspeed indicator is
not in position (AS) and the altimeter in position (AL) of Figure 5.4 below, then the
TAPES must be locked on so that the pilot cannot de-clutter them from the display
during flight.

Likewise older aircraft panel layouts that do not have the airspeed indicator to the left,
or the altimeter to the right of the attitude indicator (AI) must either relocate the
instrument(s) to these positions or set the TAPES setting to LOCK ON in the
installation configuration menu.

NOTE: The standby instruments must be collocated with each other. One standby
instrument cannot be 21 inches to the left of centerline and another 21
inches right of centerline. They must all be in the same region of the
panel.

Figure 5.4 Basic T configuration

Multi-Display Configuration

In a two or three display configuration (PFD and one or two MFD), in which an MFD is
positioned adjacent to the PFD, it is required by this STC for the TAPES to be locked on
in the installation menu so that the pilot cannot de-clutter them from display during
flight. This requirement is mandatory regardless of whether the EFD1000 MFD or the
existing IAS/ALT indicators are being used as the required standby instruments.

If an MFD is installed such that separate airspeed and altitude instruments are installed
in the basic T arrangement described above, then the PFD tapes may remain unlocked.

WARNING: Failure to adhere to these specific instrument layout requirements and
EFD1000 configuration requirements will violate the STC.

5.2.3 Directional Gyro/ HSI
The EFD1000 Flight Display will replace the existing Directional Gyro or HSI in the
panel. Provided the existing compass system is not driving a heading input to another
device in the aircraft, it may be removed from the aircraft at the operators discretion.
If another device is bootstrapped from the compass then it will need to be
determined whether RS232 or ARINC 429 heading is accepted by this device and
rewired appropriately. If the other device only accepts ARINC 407 synchro heading
then it may be necessary to keep the existing compass system in the aircraft and move
the indicator to another location.

A magnetic direction indicator whisky compass or equivalent is required as a
secondary direction indicator per FAR 23.1311(a)(5).

5.2.4 Back Up Nav Indicator
For certification reasons a backup navigation indicator is required for at least one type
of operation for which the aircraft is certificated. This means that in any installation in
an aircraft certified for IFR where the EFD1000 is the only display of navigation
information in the cockpit, a backup navigation indicator is required. This will ensure
that a failure of the EFD1000 system does not result in a complete loss of all
navigation data to the flight crew. A backup navigation indicator is not required for an
EFD1000 installation in aircraft limited to VFR.

Thus, for example, an installation that includes a panel mount GPS with an integral LCD
display that includes a moving map or CDI indicator would not require a backup nav
indicator. However, a configuration with no GPS and dual legacy VLOC radios that do
not include an integral display with CDI indications will require a backup nav indicator.

In a two or three display configuration the EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD satisfies the
requirement for a backup NAV indicator.

If there is already a dedicated indicator wired to an existing NAV Receiver or GPS then
it can be paralleled to the ACU as shown in Section 9.

CNX-80/GNS480
It is not recommended that a backup NAV indicator be connected. If it is desired to
connect a backup navigation indicator then it should only be wired to the dedicated
VOR Composite output on connector P7. Connecting the NAV indicator to the AUX CDI
output on P5 or to the Main Course Deviation output is not recommended.

WARNING: Failure to provide a backup NAV indicator when required will violate the STC.

5.2.5 GPS Annunciators
The EFD1000 is capable of displaying GPS annunciations on the HSI portion of the
display from those ARINC 429 connected GPS receivers that output these labels. If
using the PFD display for any required GPS annunciations verify that the GPS receiver
outputs these messages on the ARINC 429 bus.

GPS Annunciations on PFD (if provided by the GPS):
MSG
WPT
TERM
APPR
INTEG

NOTE: It is up to the installer to determine if the annunciations are sufficient for the
GPS navigation application.

5.2.6 Aircraft Power Requirements
An electrical load analysis must be performed to ensure the installed EFD1000
components do not exceed the current capacity of the aircrafts charging system (see
Section 7.1).

The EFD1000 system uses either an internal battery or an EBB58 to permit operation of
the EFD1000 during an aircraft charging system failure. If the aircraft bus voltage falls
below a nominal 12.3V (14V electrical system) or 24.6V (28V electrical system), and the
indicated airspeed is above 30 knots or mph (as configured), the EFD1000 will switch
to the internal battery. The installer must ensure that the aircraft electrical system
attains the minimum voltage when the electrical system is loaded to flight
configuration and engine RPM is at or above the level necessary for nominal
alternator/generator output.
The EBB58 may only be installed in a multiple display configuration and may only be
connected to an EFD1000 MFD no other connections are permitted.

5.2.7 Equipment Power Requirements
For first-time EFD installations, a switch or switch breaker to the PFD and to each MFD
must be installed. These controls are used during emergency procedures, and also
enable the PFD and MFD(s) to remain off during engine start. It is recommended that
previous PFD installations that did not include an EFIS Master switch add a switch in the
existing circuit, or replace the existing circuit breaker with a circuit breaker switch. For
multiple installations, the same style of switch/breaker should be used on each EFD.

All MFD and PFD switches must be separate to mitigate against potential single point
failure of both primary and secondary instruments. When not using a switch style
circuit breaker, each circuit breaker(s) must be a trip free pull type and must be
connected to the main battery bus (after the Battery Master Switch) as shown in the
EFD1000 wiring diagram.

The switches should be arranged in the same order as the EFDs. For example, if the
installed EFD arrangement is EFD 500 MFD, EFD1000 PFD, and EFD1000 MFD (from left
to right), the switches should be arranged in that order, from left to right. Alternately,
the switches may be arranged vertically, from top to bottom, in the same order.

If available, connect the ACU to the avionics electrical bus. Otherwise, connecting the
ACU to the switched battery bus is permissible.

5.2.8 Special Considerations for Aircraft Limited to VFR
Relief from the requirement for a secondary attitude reference for VFR aircraft has been
provided in an FAA memorandum dated December 8, 2008, Certification of Electronic
Displays in Part 23 Aircraft Limited to VFR (Visual Flight Rules) Operations; Project No.
SA9024SC-A, Aspen Avionics, Inc. FAA Approved Model List. The Policy within this
Memorandum permits exclusion of 23.1311(a)(5) with respect to the requirement for a
secondary attitude indicator for aircraft limited to VFR.

It is not acceptable to use this FAA Policy to change the established kinds of operations
authorized for a particular aircraft (see 14 CFR 23.1525). Rather, the policy may be
applied for aircraft that are limited by their certification basis to VFR only operations.
Changes to the kinds of operations authorized for any aircraft on the AML is beyond
the scope of this modification and must be established separately.

The following requirements must be met in order to install the EFD1000 without a
standby attitude indicator in U.S. registered Part 23 aircraft limited to VFR:

The aircraft must have a placard or equivalent acceptable means, stating Operation of
This Aircraft is Limited to VFR Only, or similar phraseology acceptable to the FAA, as
required by 23.1525, 23.1559 and 91.9. Since the kinds of operations will have
been limited to VFR by the aircraft certification basis, this placard should already be in
place prior to installation of the EFD1000/500 system, but should be verified.

For aircraft limited to VFR, magnetic compass information must remain independent of
the aircrafts primary electrical power.

5.3 Conventional Landing Gear tail dragger Aircraft
The following precautions are necessary for installations in aircraft with conventional landing
gear, due to the necessity of initializing the EFD1000 in a tail-down position:

The RSM must be P/N 910-00003-00X, or A-05-111-00, serial number 1301 or
above.
The on ground heading accuracy of the EFD1000 must be within +/-4 degrees. A RSM
shim might be required to meet this tolerance see Section 6.9.9.
See Section 10.5.1.1 for a conventional gear specific RSM calibration procedure.

5.4 PART 135 IFR Operations
The 30 minute internal battery in the PFD is not approved for use as a power source to meet
the electrical power source requirement under 14 CFR 23.1353, or for single engine Part 135
IFR operations under 14 CFR 135.163.

5.5 Setting V-SPEED Textual Markers
Have the aircraft operator complete Operator Configuration Checklist in Appendix C so that
this data is available prior to configuring the system in Section 10. We suggest making a copy
of this form and have it signed by owner/operator, then put a copy in Installation Package.
The V-speeds must be set in the EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD.

5.6 Optional Interfaces
5.6.1 Autopilot
The EFD1000 Pro with ACU emulates a KI-525A or NSD-360A HSI by providing HDG
Datum, CRS Datum, and navigation L/R outputs to a connected autopilot. Any
autopilot compatible with the KI-525A or NSD-360A HSI is compatible with the
EFD1000 System.

Similarly, the EFD1000 Pro with ACU emulates the KI-254, KI-256, G-550A, and 52C77
flight director indicators by accepting FD signals compatible with these indicators and
displaying them on the EFD. Autopilots that output a flight director signal that is
compatible with the KI-254/256, G-550A, or 52C77 are compatible with the EFD1000
System.

Section 9 of this document shows interconnect diagrams for common autopilots that
are compatible with the EFD1000. Because the EFD1000 outputs Heading Datum and
Course Datum via the ACU the existing HSI/DG is no longer required to provide this
output to the autopilot.

In addition, some existing autopilots that have only a DG installed (i.e. no HSI) will gain
full HSI features with the installation of the EFD1000 System. Please check the
manufacturers installation data for any jumpers or hardware that need to be added or
removed from the autopilot to add the HSI interface.

When the EFD1000 System is installed, the ACU controls all analog navigation signals
provided to the autopilot. Navigation signal output to the autopilot is switched
depending on which sensor is coupled to the EFD1000 HSI. Therefore the
LT/RT/UP/DN, flags, and ILS Energize must only be connected between the ACU and
autopilot, and there should be no direct connection between the navigation receiver
and the autopilot.

The autopilots flight director output may be paralleled from the autopilot to the
existing Flight Director and ACU so that it is displayed on both instruments. The FD
may also be connected to just the ACU for Flight Director display on the PFD when
there is no existing flight director.

5.6.2 GPS Navigator Basemap Compatibility
Not all GPS navigator outputs are the same. Some navigators provide output to
support curved flight plan segments. Other navigators can only provide the straight
segments of a flight plan, and the curved segments are not depicted. Some navigators
provide an output that result in a straight-line depiction of a curved flight plan
segment, which should not be used. It is possible to connect the navigator in an
incorrect configuration, resulting in potentially misleading information to the pilot.

NOTE: Other GPS navigators have not been evaluated and may be compatible.
Contact Aspen Avionics for information regarding additional navigators.

The following table identifies the correct configuration of compatible systems:

Navigator Navigator Mode
and/or
Type of Connection
EFD1000 Mode
and/or
Type of Connection
Basemap Depiction
Apollo
GX50
GX60
GX65
Standard Mode, RS-
232
GPS TYPE 3, RS-232 This connection method presents straight-
leg portions of flight plans. An open
segment is shown in lieu of a curved
segment.
Bendix King
KLN 90/A/B,
KLN900
Standard Mode, RS-
232
segment.
KLN 90/A/B ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method displays straight-
leg portions of flight plans.
Bendix King
KLN 94
KLN 89/B
Standard Mode, RS-
232
segment.
Bendix King KLN94
Enhanced Mode
Enhanced Mode,
RS-232
GPS TYPE 2, RS-232 This connection method presents curved
segments of flight plans.
Garmin
GPS155
GPS155XL
GPS300XL
GPS165
GNC300
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method presents curved
approaches. The GPS155XL shows an open
segment in lieu of a curved segment.
Garmin GNS-
400/500 Series
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This connection method presents curved
approaches.
Garmin GNS-
400/500 Series
RS-232 This configuration
should not be used.
This connection method can incorrectly
display curved segments as straight lines
and the displayed information can be
misleading to the pilot in certain
conditions.
Garmin GNS-480
(Software v2.0 and
below)
ARINC 429 This configuration
should not be used.
This software version has not been tested
with EFD software 2.X. GNS-480 should be
upgraded to SW v2.3.
Garmin GNS-480
(Software v2.3)
ARINC 429
GAMA 429 GFX Int

ARINC 429 This connection method presents curved
approaches.
Trimble
TNL-2000
TNL-3000
RS-232 This configuration
should not be used.
This connection method can incorrectly
display the map information.
Table 5.3 - GPS Basemap Compatibility
5.6.3 GPSS
GPS Steering provides a steering command to the autopilot through the HDG Datum
channel to provide for enroute, procedure turn, holding pattern, and turn anticipation
operation. GPSS through the EFD1000 is only available if Label 121 is transmitted by
the GPS over the ARINC 429 bus.

5.6.4 GPS/ NAV Switching
Existing GPS/NAV switching from the GPS and VLOC receiver to the original HSI will be
removed as the PFD will provide this capability. The existing GPS and VLOC receivers
will be wired directly to the PFD or ACU(s) as per the installation drawings in Section 9.
Analog connections from the GPS and/or VLOC receiver to the autopilot will be
removed and wired per the ACU to autopilot interfaces shown in Section 9.

5.6.5 Discrete Output
The discrete output from the EFD1000 PFD is used to drive an altitude reminder
Sonalert. The MFD discrete output is for future use.

5.6.6 Heading Output
It may be necessary to use a digital bus, in lieu of a synchro output, to supply an
external device such as a TAS, TCAS or Stormscope system with heading. Label 320 is
output from the ACU on P3 pins 4 & 5 via a low speed ARINC 429 bus, if no ACU is
installed then label 320 is available from the PFD pins 26 and 27.
Magnetic Heading is also available in RS-232 format from the EFD1000 Air Data
outputs (See Section 5.6.7).

Figure 5.5 Low Speed ARINC 429 Heading
NOTE: The Bendix/King KTA810/910 and KMH820/920 only accept High Speed
A429 heading and therefore are not compatible with this output.
5.6.7 Air Data Outputs
ARINC 429 air data labels are available from the PFD when no ACU is installed. If an
ACU is installed then an RS-232 connection must be made to the GPS or ancillary
equipment that requires this information. The ACU does not pass-thru air data
information to its output bus. See Section 8 for ARINC 429 air data output
specifications.

The EFD1000 PFD and MFD can each output air data information in an RS-232 format
for specific GPS and ancillary equipment. See Section 8 for RS232 air data outputs in
Format Z and Format C.

The EFD500 does not have an integral air data computer and therefore does not output
air data information.

5.6.8 Second ACU
A second ACU is required when two (2) analog VLOC receivers are installed.

5.6.9 Decision Height
A decision height (DH) input from a compatible radar altimeter may be connected to
the ACU. DH will be displayed on the PFD when decision height is reached.

5.6.10 RS-232 Considerations (existing PFD installations)
Several new RS-232 ports are enabled in v2.X software. When an EWR50 XM received is
added to the installation during a v2.X upgrade, if there is an existing RS-232 GPS
connection this will need to be moved to another port. See Section 9.

5.6.11 Flush or Recess Mounting the PFD
If there is insufficient clearance between the PFD and control column when the flight
controls are in the full nose down position, it will be required to flush mount or recess
mount the PFD in the instrument panel. Also the installer may choose to flush mount
the PFD for cosmetic reasons.
Aspen Avionics Flush Mount Kit
Aspen Avionics offers a specific Flush Mount Kit for this purpose. See Service Bulletin
SB2009-03 document number 991-00018-001 for instructions.
Locally Fabricated Brackets
If the installer chooses to fabricate their own brackets for flush mounting the displays
then this modification is beyond the scope of this manual and will require that the
brackets and the instrument panel modification be separately approved.
5.7 Traffic Sensors
The PFD and MFD systems are compatible with ARINC 735A protocol traffic systems, utilizing
the ARINC 429 interconnection. The following systems are known to be compatible:
Ryan 9900BX - (TAS)
Avidyne TAS600/610/620 - (TAS)
Garmin GTX 330 - (TIS)
L3 Skywatch 497/899 - (TAS)
Bendix/King KTA 870/KMH880 - (TAS)

Additional sensors (including TCAS I) will be added from time to time and will be identified in
subsequent revisions of this manual or in Service Bulletins or Tech Notes. Traffic sensor
control functions are performed using existing traffic equipment installations or other
compatible equipment. TCAS II is incompatible with the EFD1000/500. TCAS II installations
are not authorized.

5.8 Weather Information
The PFD and MFD systems can interface with the following weather information products:
Aspen EWR50 XM Weather Receiver
WX-500 Stormscope Sensor
EWR50 XM Weather
See Aspen Avionics document 900-00007-001 EWR50 Installation Manual for installation
data on installing the complete EWR50 system.
WX-500
The EFD can be configured so that it is the control panel and the display for the WX-500. In
this configuration the EFD will be configured for CONTROL which allows the installer to
configure the WX-500 receiver, initiate various tests, and view system data from the WX-500
via the EFD. The EFD RS232 transmitter and receiver will be connected.
If an existing WX-500 control panel exists and it is desired to keep that interface operational
then the EFD will be configured as DISPLAY and only the EFD RS232 receiver will be
connected.


6 Mechanical Installation
The PFD and MFD installation will require mechanical modifications to the aircraft. The PFD, RSM
(an RSM is required for each EFD1000 installation), and Configuration Module will be installed in all
installations, while one (1) or two (2) ACU(s), and one (1) or two (2) MFD(s) may be installed in
others. Most installations will require removing and relocating existing flight instruments to
alternate locations in the instrument panel to be used as standby instrumentation.

6.1 Unpacking and Inspecting Equipment
Inspect the equipment for evidence of shipping damage. If a damage claim is to be filed save
all shipping boxes and packing material to substantiate your claim.
To avoid damage to the equipment, do not place the EFD Displays face down on the knobs.

6.2 Equipment Location Documentation
It is required by the AML-STC that the PFD, MFD, RSM, CM, and ACU mounting locations be
recorded on Figures D1 and D2 of Appendix D. It is also required that an accurate description
of wire and cable routing be noted on the figures. This information will be required later to
comply with the ICAs. Make a copy of the form and give to owner for inclusion in permanent
aircraft records.

6.3 Log Book Entry
Make a log book entry at the completion of the installation indicating that the aircraft has
been modified in accordance with the EFD1000 AML-STC.
6.4 Weight and Balance
Using the component weights in Table 6.1 and the moment arm of the component mounting
locations perform a weight and balance calculation per AC 43.13-1B Chapter 10. Also
account for equipment removed during the modification process.
Component Weight (Ibs.)
EFD1000 with internal battery including bracket (910-00001-001) 2.9
EFD1000 without internal battery including bracket (910-00001-002) 2.1
EFD500 including bracket 2.4
RSM Remote Sensor Module 0.2
ACU Analog Converter Unit 0.8
Configuration Module 0.1
EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery including bracket 2.25
EBB Pre-Fabricated harness 7ft 1.0
Table 6.1 Component Weights

6.5 Installation Limitations
The following mounting limitations must not be exceeded during the installation of the
EFD1000 and RSM.
6.5.1 EFD1000 Installation Limitations
The EFD1000 must be mounted within 20 nose down to -10 nose up of
perpendicular to the aircraft waterline.
The EFD1000 must be mounted within 0.02.0 of the zero degree roll wings level
axis.
6.5.2 RSM Mounting Limitations
The RSM must be mounted within 4 to the longitudinal axis of the aircraft (see
Figure 6.10)
The RSM must be mounted within 10 to the zero degree roll wings level axis (see
Figure 6.13)
The RSM must be mounted within 10 to the zero pitch axis waterline of the
airframe (see Figure 6.11).
RSM must be mounted to a relatively flat surface such that when installed it will not
deform the aircraft skin and must not allow more than a .030 gap between RSM and
skin.
RSM must not be mounted to a NO ZONE as pictured in Figure 6.7, Figure 6.8, and
Figure 6.9.
Mounting the RSM to, or making other penetrations through, the aircraft pressure
vessel is beyond the scope of this STC. Separate FAA approval of pressure vessel
penetrations required to accommodate RSM mounting is required prior to the
installation of the remaining EFD1000 system components under the EFD1000 AML-
STC.
Mounting the RSM to the exterior of a composite or fabric skinned aircraft structure is
beyond the scope of this STC. To mount the RSM on composite or fabric skin aircraft
structures, separate FAA approval of the RSM mounting is required prior to the
installation of the remaining EFD1000 system components under the EFD1000 AML-
STC.
6.5.3 EFD1000 MFD RSM Limitations (Dual RSM Mounting)
The RSM provides information required for the presentation of attitude, heading and OAT
information for each EFD1000 display. If the EFD1000 MFD is used as backup for attitude
(this is presently not permitted) then the redundant RSMs in a dual EFD1000 display
installation are essential. If there is anticipation that the backup attitude indicator would
eventually be a candidate for replacement by the EFD1000 MFD, then the following would
apply: to ensure the RSM devices would remain redundant.
NOTE: If the EFD1000 MFD is not used as a backup attitude indicator, these RSM
separation requirements are only recommendations, and the minimum separation
for RSMs is six inches, edge to edge.
To avoid possible common mode failures the PFD and EFD1000 MFD RSMs should be
separated by aircraft structure and mounted in different regions of the airframe. For
example, one RSM can be top mounted on the aft empennage region while the other is
internal wing mounted (i.e., old flux sensor location). If this is not practical, the two
RSMs must be separated by a minimum of 12 inches laterally (preferably separated by
dorsal or keel structure), or if lined up longitudinally where one RSM is directly fore or
aft of the other, the separation must be a minimum of 24 inches.

Note that in future software releases it may be possible to remove the mechanical
attitude indicator, provided that sufficient separation exists between the two RSMs.

Although each RSMs wiring to its display is manufactured as individually shielded and
continuous wiring, the redundant RSM wiring is specifically not permitted to share the
same connector, nor the same shield throughout their entire installation.

A minimum of 12 lateral separation is required for all wiring (with the limited
exception of regions permitting benign bulkhead penetrations) unless physical
partitions exist.
When the EBB58 is installed its wiring harness must also remain isolated/separate from
the EFD1000 PFDs RSM wiring to provide independence. This will ensure that any
physical damage to a particular wiring bundle cannot damage both the PFDs RSM
input and the EBBs ability to provide emergency power to the EFD1000 MFD.

Turbine Compressor Rotor burst considerations (not applicable to most Class I and II
aircraft but included for completeness): If installed in a rotor burst zone the RSMs must
be installed on the top and bottom of the fuselage and not within the multiple
fragment region with corresponding wire routing. If the RSMs are outside of the rotor
burst zone but their wire routing is within this threat area, then only the wiring
installation must include this level of separation.
Bird strike considerations: If not shielded by the shadow of the fuselage, the RSMs
must either be laterally separated or installed on the top and bottom of the aircraft.
6.6 Equipment Bonding
Bond all metal components to the airframe. Prepare bonded surfaces for best contact
(resistance of connections should not exceed 0.003 ohm).
The EFD uses an installer fabricated braided bonding strap to ensure proper bonding to the
panel. The bond strap is attached with supplied screw (3/8
th
inch length) to the back of the
EFD at a location just below and left of static port. The other end of the strap is attached to
the EFD mounting bracket screw at the rear of the panel. Each EFD1000 display must have its
own (i.e. not shared with another EFD1000) bonding strap ground location.
The RSM does not require an RF ground plane, but it must be bonded to the airframe to meet
compliance with DO-160E EMI and lightning certification requirements. Bonding of the RSM is
achieved through the mounting fasteners. The attached ground wire on the RSM is not a
bonding wire but is a shield ground for the pigtail over braid and must be connected to
airframe ground. Each RSM harness shield must have its own (i.e. not shared with another
RSM) bonding location.
The ACU is bonded through its six (6) mounting holes and chassis when mounted to a metal
surface, otherwise a braided or single stranded wire bonding strap to airframe ground will
need to be fabricated for mounting on composite structures.

The optional EBB58 bracket must be bonded to the airframe ground.

6.7 Cooling
The EFD uses an integral fan for cooling. The area near the fan must be unobstructed to
permit maximum airflow through the unit. Venting and cooling air circulating behind the EFD
will improve heat dissipation and may improve equipment reliability, and is therefore a good
installation practice. The RSM, ACU, Configuration Module, and EBB58 have no cooling
requirements.

6.8 EFD Installation
Mechanical installation of the EFD requires installing the included mounting bracket,
connecting a braided bonding strap between the EFD and panel, and installing pitot and static
connections (EFD1000 only) to the two keyed quick release pressure fittings.
NOTE: To avoid damage to the equipment, do not place the EFD Display face down on the
knobs.
6.8.1 Connecting the Internal Battery (does not apply to 910-00001-002)
The internal battery may be disconnected for shipping and must be reconnected prior to the
Post Installation Flight Check and maintenance release of the aircraft.
Connection of the battery is performed as follows:
1. Remove the two screws that hold the battery cover in place. The battery cover is
located below the 44 pin connector on the EFD cylinder.
2. Remove the battery cover.
3. Plug the battery connector into the mating connector within the battery compartment.
4. Re-install the battery cover. Be careful to avoid pinching the wires with the cover.
5. Re-install the two screws to hold the battery cover in place.
6. Verify Bat: status on page 10 of the Main Menu shows Charging when external
power is supplied to the EFD.
6.8.2 PFD Mounting Location
The PFD must be mounted approximately centered in the instrument panel per FAR
23.1321(d). If the two existing instrument holes that contain the attitude indicator and
direction indicator are not exactly centered, but are the closest instruments to the
center, then that position is acceptable for mounting the PFD.
The PFD can be mounted on the non-pilot (typically right side) side of the instrument
panel if it is not for use by any required pilot during takeoff, initial climb, final
approach, and landing. Backup instruments are required on the pilot side only. See
14CFR 23.1311 and 14CFR 23.1321.

NOTE: Modification to the existing instrument panel is not authorized under this
STC. Any modification must be approved separately.

Figure 6.1 - PFD Mounting Location

6.8.3 MFD1000 Mounting Location
Since the MFD1000 may become a PFD during MFD to PFD reversion, the EFD1000 MFD
should be positioned adjacent to the right or left of the PFD. If this is not practical or
permitted (such as with Barber Pole airspeed indicators, see note below), then the
EFD1000 MFD must be mounted in the pilots primary maximum field of view in a
position that meets FAR 23.1321(a) if it is to be used as a backup instrument or if the
MFD is for use by any required pilot during takeoff, initial climb, final approach, and
landing. The requirements are +/- 35 degrees from the pilots center line horizontally
(+/- 21 inches from centerline as defined by AC23.1311-1b). See Figure 5.3.
NOTE: Aircraft with V
MO
barber pole airspeed indicators must keep the airspeed
indicator and altimeter in the original positions (to preserve the basic T) and the
airspeed/altitude tapes on the PFD (and reverted MFD) must be locked off. This
will require any MFD to be positioned outside of the airspeed indicator or
altimeter.
NOTE: The standby instruments must be co-located with each other. One standby
instrument cannot be 21 inches to the left of centerline and another 21 inches
right of centerline. The instruments must all be in the same region of the panel.
This applies to the EFD1000 MFD when used as the standby airspeed and altitude
the standby AI must be co-located with the EFD1000 MFD.
6.8.4 EFD Mounting Bracket Installation
The pre-drilled holes in the mounting bracket (see Figure 6.3) support both standard
3 round instrument holes, and 3ATI square cutouts. The bracket is centered on the
upper instrument hole. The lower portion of the bracket is provisioned with screw
slots, allowing variable vertical spacing configurations.

If the lower cutout is a 3ATI or other larger standard cutout, a commercially available
metal blanking plate should be used to flush fill the cutout. Use the EFD Mounting
Bracket as a template to cut the 2.10 diameter cutout for the fan and two 0.150
diameter mounting holes. All cut edges should be treated to prevent corrosion.

Aircraft with tilted instrument panels of 20 or less can install the EFD flat against the
panel. The tilt will later be removed electronically in the system configuration using
the Panel Tilt Pitch Adjustment.

The EFD is attached to the instrument panel in 6 places with MS24693-S30 (#6-32
flathead screws), NAS1149FN632P (washers), and MS21044N06 (#6-32 Nuts). It is also
acceptable to use existing #6 nutplates or equivalent.

1) Burnish the back of the instrument panel around one of the 6 mounting holes to
allow for bracket to instrument panel bonding through the screw/washer/nut.
2) Loosely install the bracket with the upper two mounting screws/nuts/washers as
shown in Figure 6.2.
3) Use an inclinometer on the top of the EFD bracket with the aircraft level to make
this adjustment. It may be necessary to slot the existing holes to align the bracket
in the roll axis.
4) The PFD must be mounted within 0.02.0 of the zero degree roll wings level
axis.
5) Fabricate an 8 bonding strap from braid and two ground lugs. Attach one ground
lug to a mounting screw on the backside of the panel (see Figure 6.4).
6) Install remaining EFD mounting bracket screws and nuts.
7) Tighten all six (6) mounting screws and nuts to 12 in-lbs anchoring the bracket to
the panel.


Figure 6.2 EFD and Bracket Installation

Figure 6.3 - EFD Mounting Bracket (inches)

6.8.5 EFD Bonding Strap
An 8 or shorter braided bonding strap is required between the screw (below and left
of the static port- see Figure 6.4) on the backside of the EFD to a location on the
backside of the instrument panel using one of the mounting screws and nuts. Each
RSM harness shield must have its own (i.e. not shared with another RSM) bonding
location. Verify 3 milliohms resistance to airframe ground at bonding strap
connection point.


Figure 6.4 EFD Bonding Strap Connection

6.8.6 Pitot and Static Connections (EFD1000 only)
Pitot and Static connections are made to the EFD1000 via two keyed quick connect
fittings. These connections will typically require a T fitting to be installed in-line with
the existing altimeter and airspeed indicators.

The quick connectors are keyed such that they cannot be interchanged. Once the
correct quick connector is fastened to the pitot and static lines, they cannot be
inadvertently swapped on the rear of the EFD unit.

Installations that include an EFD1000 MFD require that there be an alternate static
valve accessible to the pilot while seated in the normal position. Installation of an
alternate static valve is outside the scope of the EFD1000 STC.

If the aircraft has dual pitot/static systems then connect the PFD to one system and the
EFD1000 MFD (if installed) to the other independent pitot/static system.

NOTE: The pitot quick connector will fit on the EFD static port but the static quick
connector cannot be inadvertently connected to the EFD pitot port due to
the keying.

Each connector has a 0.256 diameter barbed fitting that accepts a hose.

Figure 6.5 - Pitot & Static Quick Connector
6.8.7 Quick Connector Installation
1) Insert T fitting into existing aircraft Pitot line and secure with Aero Seal 6604 or
equivalent hose clamp (see Figure 6.6).
2) Connect a length of pitot line tubing between the T fitting and the P quick
connector. Verify the length of tubing can be installed with no drip loop and that it
can be secured away from flight controls. Secure each end with Aero Seal 6604 or
equivalent hose clamps.
3) Insert T fitting into existing aircraft Static line and secure with Aero Seal 6604 or
equivalent hose clamp (see Figure 6.6).
4) Connect a length of static line tubing between the T fitting and the S quick
connector. Verify the length of tubing can be installed with no drip loop and that it
can be secured away from flight controls. Secure each end with Aero Seal 6604 or
equivalent hose clamps.
5) Secure pitot and static lines as necessary to prevent interference with other aircraft
structures and components.

CAUTION: Secure pitot and static lines so that they will not interfere with flight
controls and are not at risk of mechanical damage.

STATIC
PITOT
STATIC QUICK
CONNECTOR
A-06-505-00
PITOT QUICK
CONNECTOR
A-06-507-00
(KEYED)
EFD1000
ID TUBING
PITOT
STATIC
T FITTING SPLICE INTO PITOT LINE
HOSE CLAMP
(4 PLACES)
T FITTING SPLICE INTO STATIC LINE
ID TUBING

Figure 6.6 Pitot & Static Line Connections

6.8.8 Leak Check Requirements
A pitot static leak check is required after the installation of the quick connectors and
the EFD1000 is installed. The quick connectors are designed such that they seal when
disconnected.
6.9 RSM Installation
CAUTION: The RSM is an integral part of the attitude function of the AHRS. A stable and
magnetically quiet location for the RSM is essential for proper AHRS operation.
CAUTION: There are special considerations for mounting the RSM on composite, fabric and
pressurized aircraft. See 6.9.2 and 6.9.3.
There are three versions of RSM available for mounting in different orientations. The 001
version includes an internal emergency use GPS and is generally for external top mounting,
although may also be internally mounted. The 002 version does not include the internal GPS
and is for external or internal mounting in a top-mounted orientation. The 003 version also
does not include the internal GPS and is for external or internal mounting in a bottom-
mounted orientation.
NOTE: If the RSM is mounted internally the OAT sensor must be disabled which will result
in no TAS and wind display. If the RSM is mounted on the bottom, or internally
mounted in an aluminum aircraft, then the emergency GPS sensor will be disabled.
The RSM includes magnetic flux sensors which is why it is important to locate the RSM as far
away from the cabin and baggage (or hat rack) compartment as practical as these areas may
have varying magnetic fields (baggage, passengers, etc.).
The RSM should not be mounted within 18 inches of a VHF Comm antenna, 6 inches of a GPS
or ELT antenna, or within 12 inches of an active traffic antenna or DME antenna.
The RSM should be mounted to a relatively flat surface such that there is less than .030 gap
surrounding the RSM when installed. The RSM must not be mounted to an excessively curved
area which could deform the RSM or aircraft skin.
The RSM must not be mounted within a composite fairing such as a fiberglass wingtip cover,
or vertical fin cover as these do not protect against direct lightning effects.
RSM External Top Mounting
See Figure 6.7. The RSM is typically installed near the tail of the aircraft on an unpressurized
portion of the airframe. To take advantage of the OAT sensor and internal GPS (-001 only) the
RSM must be mounted on the top outside of the airframe. Any RSM may be mounted
internally if an outside location is impractical. Whenever an RSM is internally mounted, the
OAT must be configured off and the internal GPS (-001 only) may need to be disabled if GPS
signal reception is problematic.
For a top external mount the preferred RSM installation area is a minimum of 12 inches
behind a typical baggage or (hat rack) compartment to no closer than 39 from the end of the
fuselage. The Less Preferred areas over the cabin should only be selected if impossible to
find an acceptable location within the Preferred area of Figure 6.7.
Unlike a GPS antenna that is used for primary navigation, the backup GPS usage and inherent
sensitivity do not require a full view of the sky. Therefore, the vertical stabilizer may partially
mask the antennas view of the sky/horizon. Installation on either side of the vertical fin is
acceptable.
When externally mounted, the NO ZONE areas are hot zones for a lightning strike and are not
to be used for mounting the RSM. The RSM must not be mounted externally to the wing, the
top of the vertical stabilizer, the horizontal stabilizer, the fuselage forward of the cabin, or
within 39 of the tail as measured from the fuselage aft end as shown.
If it is impossible to find a suitable external mounting location in the preferred area, and
internal mounting is not possible, it may be permissible to mount the RSM above the cabin.
A location will need to be found that is a minimum of 18 inches from any small cabin speakers
or electronic device that can cause compass fluctuations. Large cabin speakers may cause
RSM interference at distances up to 3 feet. Use the procedure in Section 6.9.1 to locate a
quiet area. During operation of the electrical systems concentrate on those devices that are in
the cabin and within the headliner. Be aware that headsets and other items worn by and
operated by the flight crew and passengers could potentially interfere with the RSM. Typically
this would be when the headset is within 12 of the RSM location. Find a location that cannot
be affected by passenger and flight crew headsets while seated or moving about the cabin.
RSM Internal Mounting
With software version 2.X it is also possible to internally mount the RSM within an area of the
aircraft fuselage or wing structure that is magnetically benign. For aluminum aircraft, the RSM
may be mounted anywhere inside the aluminum structure.
For composite or fabric covered aircraft, the RSM must not be mounted forward of the
windscreen, or within 39 of the aft end of the fuselage. It may be mounted within the wing
but no closer than 39 of the wingtip. It must not be mounted within the horizontal stabilizer,
or within the vertical stabilizer. See Figure 6.8.
NOTE: If internally mounting the RSM a mounting plate must be locally fabricated and
approved separately. All mounting instructions for a magnetically quiet location
still apply.
RSM External Bottom Mounting
Figure 6.9. The003 version of the RSM is designed for external bottom mounting. This
version may be mounted to any magnetically quiet area on the underside of the fuselage.
Mounting this RSM to the underside of an aerodynamic surface, such as the wing or the
horizontal stabilizer is not approved. Any location that results in the OAT sensor becoming
heated from engine exhaust requires that the OAT sensor be disabled in configuration menus.
See Figure 6.9.

Figure 6.7 - RSM-External Mounting Locations (Top/Side View) all aircraft types
NO ZONE
NO ZONE
NO ZONE
Preferred Area
Less
Preferred Area
(See Note)
NO ZONE

Figure 6.8 - RSM Internal Mounting Locations Composite/Fabric Aircraft


Figure 6.9 - RSM-003 External Mounting Locations (Bottom view)

6.9.1 Proposed RSM Location Check
The installer must determine the best RSM location given the above factors. A
navigation quality handheld compass (i.e., hiking compass) can be used to find a
magnetically quiet area free from the effects of magnetic disturbances from flight
controls, autopilot servos, strobes, or any other large magnetic field appliance.

The RSM can detect magnetic fields in three dimensions. This means that magnetic
influences below the RSM can also affect performance. Be sure to evaluate potential
magnetic influences above and below the RSM.

NOTE: Changes to the magnetic field around the RSM can affect the RSM
calibration and require revalidation of the RSM performance.

Known sources of interference include (but are not limited to) the following types of
material located near the RSM (normally, these materials within 12 inches can cause
interference):

a. Steel-wound hose (e.g. SCAT tube)
b. Steel hose clamps
c. Magnetized or magnetic hardware
d. Servos
e. Trim motors
f. Poor bonding of electrical connections
g. Blower motors

Place a small handheld compass in the proposed RSM mounting location and move the
compass around the location looking for needle deflection. There should be no more
than 2 of compass needle movement within an area 18 x 18 around the proposed
location. Should the compass show excessive needle movement it will be required to
find a new location or, if feasible, treat the affected area with a degaussing coil.
Contact Aspen Avionics product support for information on obtaining or using a
handheld degaussing coil. A degaussing coil can be purchased at most audio and
video stores.

Operate flight controls from stop to stop and verify no more than 2 of compass needle
movement. Should the compass show excessive needle movement it will be required
to find a new location or degauss the flight control cables and or flight control
hardware.

Operate all electrical systems. The compass needle should not deflect more than 2
degrees during testing.
If a location cannot be found with less than 2 degrees of deflection then the electrical
device causing the interference will need to be determined. The device causing the
interference may need to be re-bonded or the wiring may need to be relocated.

If the compass does not show any deflection from electrical or mechanical sources then
that location should be acceptable to mount the RSM.

6.9.2 Pressurized Aircraft
On pressurized aircraft it will be necessary for the RSM wiring to penetrate the aircraft
pressure vessel. The installer is responsible for obtaining proper documentation and
FAA approvals from either the airframe manufacturer or from a DER or FAA field office
for any penetrations of the pressure vessel or bulkhead.

CAUTION: Penetration of the pressure vessel is not approved under this STC and will
require separate approval.

CAUTION: Mounting the RSM on the pressure vessel is beyond the scope of this STC
and requires separate approval.

6.9.3 RSM mounting on Composite, Fabric or Damage-Tolerant Design Aircraft
Approval for the structural aspects of mounting the RSM to a composite or fabric
skinned aircraft, including consideration for the direct effects of lightning, is beyond
the scope of the EFD1000 AML STC. Separate FAA approval for structural and lightning
direct effects considerations is required before mounting the RSM on these aircraft
types.

RSM installation on aircraft certified to 14CFR Part 23 Amendment 23-48 or later (such
as the Gippsland GA-8) must be evaluated for damage tolerance. Therefore the
installation of the RSM on these aircraft is beyond the scope of this manual and
requires separate approval.

The installation information for the RSM in this manual is satisfactory to meet the
requirements for the direct effects of lightning for all metal aircraft.

It is not possible to determine the lightning direct effects on equipment mounted
internally in composite and fabric aircraft. Therefore, the only acceptable areas for
RSM internal mounting are shown in Figure 6.8. The same bonding requirements for
an external mounting must be adhered to.

Though separate approval must be obtained for the RSM structural and, in the case of
fabric and composite aircraft, lightning direct effects; installation of the remaining
EFD1000 system components is approved under the EFD1000 AML-STC. This includes
HIRF and lightning induced transient susceptibility approval of the EFD1000 system
installation (i.e. display, RSM, CM, ACU, and associated wiring).

Each RSM harness shield must have its own (i.e. not shared with another RSM) bonding
location.

6.9.4 Second RSM Placement (MFD1000)
Use the EFD1000 MFDs RSM mounting limitations in Section 6.5.3.

6.9.5 RSM Mounting Angles
For RSM mounting the following maximum mounting angles apply.

Longitudinal Axis

Figure 6.10 RSM Top View longitudinal Alignment

Pitch Axis
Maximum fore and aft tilt is in relation to the aircraft waterline. An aluminum shim
might be required to keep orientation within limits (see Section 6.9.9 for shim
fabrication).

Figure 6.11 RSM Fore or Aft Max Tilt

Figure 6.12 RSM Fore or Aft Max Tilt (Shim installed)

Roll Axis
Maximum side to side tilt is 10 degrees in relation to wings level. An aluminum shim
might be required to keep orientation within limits (see Section 6.9.9 for shim
fabrication).

Figure 6.13 RSM Side to Side Max Tilt

Figure 6.14 RSM Side to Side Max Tilt (Shim installed)
6.9.6 RSM External Mount Aluminum Skin
This STC approves the use of the doubler shown in 6.15 for Aluminum Skinned aircraft
only. Mounting the RSM to a composite or fabric aircraft is not approved by this STC
and will require that the installer obtain separate approval of the RSM mounting on
these classes of aircraft. After the RSM mounting has been approved, this STC may be
subsequently installed.

The doubler is to be fabricated by the installer using the dimensions and rivet holes as
shown. Should the installer wish to deviate from this doubler in size, rivet count, rivet
spacing, or doubler thickness, they are required to seek separate approval.

6.9.6.1 RSM Doubler Fabrication
1) Determine the thickness of aircraft skin.
2) For aircraft skins 0.050 thick and less the doubler should be made from 0.050
material. For aircraft skins thicker than 0.050 the doubler should be made from
material the same thickness as the skin.

Figure 6.15 RSM Doubler
3) Fabricate the doubler from 2024-T3 AMS-QQ-A-250/5 to the dimensions in Figure
6.15, Tolerances 0.030

4) Remove burrs and break sharp edges (0.005 0.015)
5) Finish with Alumiprep Etch and Alodine Conversion Coating, or equivalent.
6) Mask around the four (4) mounting holes the diameter of the mounting washers or
1/2" on the down side of the doubler (see Figure 6.16). Prime that side with epoxy
primer per MIL-P-23377 or equivalent. Do not prime the side that faces the aircraft
skin. This allows for a doubler to aircraft skin bond and mounting washer to
doubler bond.
7) Mark forward direction on doubler because pattern is not symmetrical.
8) Using the doubler as a template match drill holes in aircraft fuselage at location
determined from Section 6.9.1. Doubler must be aligned to the longitudinal axis of
the aircraft to within 4 (see Figure 6.10).

Figure 6.16 - Masking of Doubler

9) Remove burrs and break sharp edges on the aircraft skin (0.005 0.015)
10) Burnish the aircraft skin on the inner surface in the area where the doubler will
mount. Apply Alodine 1201 and do not prime.
11) Mount a ground stud to the doubler for attachment of the RSM shield wire. Use an
MS24693-C52 #8-32 flathead screw and AN364-832A locknut or equivalent as
shown.

Figure 6.17 - Ground Stud Mounting

12) The doubler is attached to the inside surface of the aircraft skin with solid rivets.
For aircraft skin less than 0.032 thick install with MS20470AD4 protruding head
rivets.
For aircraft skin thickness of 0.032 install with NAS1097AD4 rivets flush in the
fuselage skin. Carefully control the countersink depth to not knife edge the
fuselage skin.
For aircraft skin thicknesses 0.040 to 0.050 install with NAS1097AD4 rivets
flush in the fuselage skin.
For aircraft skins 0.063 or thicker install with NAS1097AD5 rivets flush in the
fuselage skin.
13) Verify that the ground stud has 3 milliohms to ground.

Figure 6.18 - Doubler Installation
6.9.7 RSM Internal Mount
The installer must use a suitable existing shelf or fabricate a suitable mounting bracket
for internally mounting the RSM. Use AC43.13-2B Chapter 1 for additional structural
data.

6.9.8 RSM Installation
CAUTION: Do not use a magnetic tipped screw driver to mount the RSM as this may
magnetize the RSM and cause heading errors.
CAUTION: Only use stainless steel or brass mounting hardware (i.e., screws, nuts,
washers, nutplates) to mount the RSM. Use of any other ferrous screws or
hardware may cause compass errors.

1) It is not required to remove aircraft surface paint below RSM unless an aluminum
shim was required on extreme mounting angles. The shim must be bonded to the
fuselage. Bonding of RSM is through four (4) mounting screws to doubler.
2) Install ring terminal to RSM shield ground wire.
3) Install RSM on aircraft and secure using four (4) screws, four (4) washers, and four
(4) nuts as identified below. Installer may substitute nut plates for washers and
nuts provided the nutplates are attached to the doubler only and not the aircraft
skin. Nutplates must be stainless steel and non-ferrous.

Description (equivalent hardware may
be used)
Description (equivalent hardware
may be used)
8-32 Brass screw 1 MS35214-47 8-32 Stainless Steel screw 1
MS27039C08-17
Brass locking nuts MS21044B08
(formerly AN365-B832)
Stainless Steel locking nuts
MS21044C08
Brass Washer NAS1149B0832H
(formerly AN960-B8)
OR
Stainless Steel washer
NAS1149EN0832P or
NAS1149CN0832R
Figure 6.19 - RSM Mounting Hardware

4) Torque hardware to 12-15 in-lbs.
5) Attach ring terminal to ground stud on RSM doubler.
6) Apply a bead of non-corrosive sealant around the RSM and over each mounting
screw.

Doubler
(installer fabricated)
Aircraft Skin
FWD

Figure 6.20 RSM Mounting

6.9.9 RSM Shim Fabrication (if necessary)
If the RSM exceeds the mounting limits of Section 6.9.5 a shim will be required.

Fabricate a shim with the dimensions of the RSM baseplate. Optionally the shim can be
made square and slightly larger than the RSM baseplate for ease of construction (see
Figure 6.21).

Figure 6.21 Example Shim Top View

The shim must not exceed the minimum and maximum thickness as shown in Figure
6.22.


Figure 6.22 Example Shim Side View

1) Use RSM doubler as a template to mark shim stock.

2) Fabricate shim from 2024-T3 aluminum with the four (4) mounting holes and
0.625 cable pass-thru drilled through.

3) Remove burrs and break sharp edges (0.005 0.015)

4) Finish with Alumiprep Etch and Alodine Conversion Coating, or equivalent.
5) Mask off top side of shim 1/4 inside mounting surface of RSM and mask off a
similar area on the bottom so that these areas remain Alodine only (see Figure
6.23). Prime unmasked areas with epoxy primer per MIL-P-23377 or equivalent.
Paint to match aircraft color if desired.

Figure 6.23 Masking of Shim for Priming

6) The shim must be bonded to the aircraft skin by removing the paint and prepping
the aircraft surface where the shim and RSM will be mounted. Remove paint
inside the outer footprint of the RSM mounting location. Burnish the aircraft skin
and apply Alodine 1201, do not prime.

7) Sandwich the shim between the aircraft skin and the RSM following the RSM
installation procedure in Section 6.9.8.

8) Apply non corrosive sealant around shim and RSM.

6.10 ACU Installation
The ACU has no user interface, and therefore can be remote mounted. The optimum
mounting location is an area that minimizes wire runs to interfacing equipment. This typically
means near the autopilot computer if installed.

When mounting the ACU find a location in the aircraft of known load carrying capabilities such
as:
Existing Avionics Shelf
Baggage compartment
Radio Rack
Cockpit Floor

Figure 6.24 ACU Mount to Flat Metal Shelf

6.10.1 ACU Mounting
Mount ACU to existing shelf in any orientation using six (6) MS35206 #6-32 screws,
six (6) NAS1149FN632P washers, and six (6) MS21044N06 #6-32 self locking nuts or
equivalent. Tighten nuts to 12 in-lbs.

An unpainted surface of the ACU case must be bonded to aircraft ground either
through mounting to a metal shelf or with an installer fabricated bonding strap of wire
braid or single stranded wire no more than 12 inches in length. Attach ground lug of
bonding strap to one of the mounting screws if required.

Verify ACU case to airframe ground has 3 milliohms of resistance.

Should a shelf or bracket need to be fabricated in order to install the ACU it is beyond
the scope of this STC and will require separate FAA approval for that modification.

15
20
1
1
14
37
19
13
25
1
9
8

Figure 6.25 ACU Dimensions (inches)
6.11 Configuration Module Installation

The Configuration Module will be cable tied to the PFD wire harness. Leave just enough slack
in the cable ties so that the configuration module can slide along the PFD cable. This will
prevent strain on the configuration module connector while the PFD harness is manipulated
during installation and subsequent removal/replacement.


Figure 6.26 Configuration Module Dimensions (inches)

Cable Tie two (2) places
Figure 6.27 Configuration Module Tie Wrapped to Harness

6.12 EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery Installation
The EBB58 has no user interface so it can be remote mounted. A location within the cabin will
need to be selected so that it can be securely mounted and still be close enough to the
EFD1000 MFD to fall within the maximum cable length. It should not be mounted where it can
be disturbed by the occupants.
The EBB58 must be mounted within the temperature controlled part of the aircraft. It must
not be mounted to the firewall. The battery warms during operation and therefore should not
be mounted under a seat.
The installer must use an existing shelf with suitable load carrying capabilities or fabricate a
suitable mounting bracket for mounting the EBB58. Use AC43.13-2B Chapters 1 for additional
structural data.

Figure 6.28 - EBB58 Mounting Bracket Installation

6.12.1 EBB58 Mounting
Secure EBB58 bracket to existing structure or fabricated bracket using four (4)
MS35206 #6-32 screws, four (4) NAS1149FN632P washers, and four (4) MS21044N06
#6-32 self locking nuts or equivalent. Tighten nuts to 12 in-lbs.

Install the EBB58 in the rack so that the rear tab is properly retained and the spring
clips are fully seated (see Figure 6.29).
NOTE: If the spring clip(s) are sprung so the pins do not fully seat, the mounting
bracket must be replaced.

Figure 6.29 - EBB58 Attachment locations


7 Electrical Installation

7.1 Electrical Load Analysis
Perform an electrical load analysis to verify the aircraft complies with FAR 23.1351(a) using
the current draw of each installed component as determined from Table 7.1 below.

Component Current Draw (amps)
EFD1000 2.4 nominal @ 28Vdc
4.8 nominal @ 14Vdc
EFD500 0.8 nominal @ 28Vdc
1.6 nominal @ 14Vdc
RSM Remote Sensor Module Current Draw
included in EFD1000
ACU Analog Converter Unit 0.5 nominal @28Vdc
1.0 nominal @ 14Vdc
Configuration Module Current draw
included in EFD1000
Table 7.1 Current Draw
7.2 Electrical Installation
EFD1000 PFD
A dedicated 7.5 amp pull type circuit breaker or breaker/switch combination for the EFD1000
PFD must be installed in a location accessible to the pilot while seated. The breaker will be
powered from the switched battery or essential bus. Label the switch and/or breaker
EFD1000 PFD. Note the switch may be labeled PFD in a PFD only configuration. The switch
must be rated for at least 7.5 amps continuous duty. Record the location of circuit breaker
and switch on Figure D3 of Appendix D.
EFD1000 MFD
A dedicated 7.5 amp pull type circuit breaker and separate switch or breaker/switch
combination for the EFD1000 MFD must be installed in a location accessible to the pilot while
seated. The breaker will be powered by the switched battery or essential bus. Label the switch
and/or breaker EFD1000 MFD. Note - The switch must be rated for at least 7.5 amps
continuous duty. Record the location of circuit breaker and switch on Figure D3 of
Appendix D.
If the aircraft has independent electrical systems then the PFD will be connected to one bus
and the MFD must be connected to the other independent bus.

EFD500 MFD
A dedicated 5A to 7.5A pull type circuit breaker and separate switch or breaker/switch
combination for the EFD500 MFD must be installed in a location accessible to the pilot while
seated. The breaker will be powered by the switched battery or essential bus. Label the switch
and/or breaker EFD500 MFD. The switch must be rated for at least 7.5 amps continuous
duty. The EFD500 MFD must have its own independent switch. Record the location of circuit
breaker and switch on Figure D3 of Appendix D.

ACU (optional)
A two (2) amp pull type circuit breaker for the ACU must be installed in a location accessible
to the pilot while seated. Wire the power source from the avionics bus (switched battery bus if
no avionics bus exists). The breaker is to be labeled ACU or ACU #1 in a dual ACU
installation. If a second ACU is installed it will require its own two (2) amp breaker labeled
ACU #2. Record the location of circuit breaker(s) on Figure D3 of Appendix D.
EBB58 (optional)
The EBB58 connects via a prefabricated harness to the back of the EFD1000 MFD (P/N 910-
00001-002 only). A Locking Toggle switch rated for at least 0.5A continuous duty must be
installed in a location accessible to the pilot while seated. The switch must be labeled EBB
EMER DISC and have a DISC and NORM position. The NORM position is when the switch is
in the open position. The switch will be connected to the EBB D-sub connector as shown in
Figure 7.5. Record the location of the switch on Figure D3 of Appendix D.

Miscellaneous Wiring
Use of MIL-C-27500 shielded wire and MIL-W-22759 single conductor wire is recommended.
All wires should be fabricated as shown in Section 9 keeping all grounds as short as possible.
Wires and connectors must be clearly marked per FAR 23.1365(d).
Wires and wiring bundles must be secured in such a way to eliminate risk of mechanical
damage and minimize exposure to heat and fluids per FAR 23.1365(e).

7.2.1 HIRF/Lightning Requirements
In order to meet HIRF and Lightning requirements it is required that the following cable
runs use either an over braid applied during fabrication or double shielded wires. The
over braid or double shield should extend within the back shell and must be grounded
at both ends.

All ARINC 429 and RS-232 wiring into or out of the EFD require either a double
shielded wire or a tinned copper over braid be applied over the twisted shielded
pair. See Figure 7.1 below and NOTE 1 on Wiring Diagrams 9.4 through 9.14.

Figure 7.1 Over Braid/ Double Shield Requirements
The following wires require single shields to comply with HIRF and Lightning
requirements:

Aircraft power to the EFD requires a single stranded shielded wire from circuit
breaker to EFD. See Figure 9.1.
The discrete output from the EFD to the Sonalert (or relay) and the power wire
from circuit breaker to Sonalert (or relay) require a single stranded shielded wire.
See Figure 9.1.
EFD to Configuration Module comes as an assembly with color coded wires and
uses an over braid over non-shielded single conductor wires.
EFD1000 to RSM wiring does not require the over braid or double shield, only what is
specified in Section 7.2.3.

ACU to GPS, ACU to VLOC receiver, and ACU to autopilot require no additional
shielding just what is specified in the wiring diagrams of Section 9.

7.2.2 EFD to GPS/VLOC/ACU Wiring
Use tinned copper over braid or double shielded wires on all ARINC 429 and RS-232
wires entering or exiting the EFD back shell. Ground the over braid and wire shields
within the back shell. If using double shielded wire it may be difficult to terminate all
shields within the back shell. If this is the case then use a piece of tinned copper over
braid that extends at least 6 inches outside the back shell to cover all unshielded
wires(see Figure 7.2).

Figure 7.2 EFD Back Shell Grounds
At the GPS/VLOC/ACU terminate the over braid within the back shell or as close as
possible. Ground the over braid at this end using a pigtail as short as possible. If
using double shielded wires then ground both shields at the GPS/VLOC/ACU with
pigtail as short as possible.

7.2.3 RSM Wiring
The EFD1000 to RSM wiring run is made with a single cable seven (7) conductor
shielded wire. M27500-A24SD7T23, M27500-22TG7T14 or equivalent 22 or 24AWG
seven (7) conductor shielded cable can be used.

Assembly using Aspen P/N A-08-148-00-A 30ft cable

This cable assembly is prefabricated with the following wire color markings and will be
cut to length at the EFD1000.

Pin 1 White/Black
Pin 2 White/Red
Pin 3 White/Orange
Pin 4 White/Yellow
Pin 5 White/Green
Pin 6 White/Blue
Pin 7 White

Assembly using M27500-A24SD7T23 or equivalent Cable:
Terminate the aircraft side of the RSM wiring with the Hirose circular connector from
installation kit as shown in Figure 7.3 below. Due to the compact design of the Hirose
connector it may be easier to solder the wires to the solder cups on the bench versus
inside the tail of the aircraft. Use a fine tip soldering iron for this procedure.

1. Pass the cable through the hood and metal cover. Strip back the insulation to
expose the shielding and wires with the dimensions that are shown.
2. Stake the metal clamper to the shield in the location shown. A hexagonal crimper
such as the ones used for BNC Coax connector assembly work can be used to
crimp it to approximately 5.2mm outside diameter.
3. Assemble the two pieces of the connector such that the solder cup piece is retained
by the ring. Discard the washer as it is not required.
4. Solder the seven (7) 24 AWG wires to the connector.
5. Thread metal cover onto connector.
6. Insert screw into metal cover so that it indents into metal clamper.
7. Put hood over metal cover.


Figure 7.3 RSM Connector assembly

CAUTION: Do not run RSM wiring near high current devices such as strobes and air
conditioners and avoid running RSM wiring in same wire bundle as strobe
and air conditioning wiring bundles if at all practical.

EFD END
Terminate the shield at the PFD end inside the back shell. Attach pigtail ground wire to
shield and connect to ground screw as shown in Figure 7.4.

Figure 7.4 EFD Back Shell Grounds/RSM

7.2.4 Configuration Module Wiring
The Configuration Module (CM) connector comes as an assembly with color coded
wires within an over braid. The wires are inserted into the appropriate pins as shown
in Figure 9.1. The green wire with ground lug is attached to back shell.

PFD Pin Color CM Pin
41 Black 1
42 Brown 2
43 Orange 4
44 Red 3
-- Green 5

7.2.5 ACU Wiring
Wire the ACU as shown in Section 9 keeping all grounds as short as possible. No
additional HIRF shielding is required. The ACU case must be grounded to airframe
ground for proper operation.
7.2.6 Back Up NAV Indicator Wiring
Wire the Nav indicator as shown in Figures 9.24, 9.25, and 9.26. Do not parallel more
than one NAV Indicator to each ACU. When paralleling the wiring make the splice is as
close to the navigation receiver as practical. Do not splice the connection at the back
of the NAV indicator.
7.2.7 Autopilot Wiring
Wire the autopilot to ACU as shown in Section 9. Remove any existing connections and
switching between GPS and NAV receivers to autopilot. Only ARINC 429 wiring may
remain between the GPS and autopilot for NAV mode GPSS. The ACU will perform all
switching functions to autopilot for GPS1, GPS2, NAV1, NAV2.
7.2.8 EBB58 Wiring
The EBB58 Wiring harness comes prefabricated with connectors both at the battery and
the MFD end. The twisted pair for the Emergency Battery Disconnect switch should be
cut to length and connected across the required SPST locking toggle type emergency
battery disconnect switch. Optionally a SPST switch and integral guard may be
installed in place of the locking toggle switch. The guard would be installed so the
switch is normally open. When the guard is lifted and the switch is enabled, the switch
will close, disconnecting the relay in the EBB. The shield is not grounded at the switch
end.

The switch must be installed in a position so that is accessible to the pilot while
seated. Be sure the switch guard can remain open so the guard does not return to the
resting position and inadvertently open the switch.

NOTE: When in the DISC position, the EBB Emergency Disconnect switch
energizes a relay powered by the EBB. Thus, when the switch is in the
DISC position, the Emergency battery will gradually discharge through the
relay.

Plug prefabricated wiring harness in to EBB58 and secure the connector by tightening
the jackscrews. Connect the other end to the back of the EFD1000 MFD (P/N 910-
00001-002 only) and secure the connector by tightening the jackscrews. The EBB
battery cable must be routed separately from the MFD main power wiring and the PFD
RSM wiring.

Figure 7.5 - EBB Wiring Harness Switch Connections

Figure 7.6 - EBB EMER DISC switch labeling
8 Electrical Connections

8.1 EFD Electrical Specifications
8.1.1 Power Input
Nominal Input: 14Vdc or 28Vdc
Operating Range: 9Vdc to 32Vdc (Note: Input power must transition >11VDC
to turn on the unit)
8.1.2 Tone (PFD)/Reversion (MFD) Output
Active on: Ground
Inactive off: Open
Load Current: 100ma maximum

8.1.3 RS-232 GPS Input
Data is accepted in packets coded in the industry standard "avionics" format at a baud
rate of 9600, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. Packets are accepted at approximately
1 Hz.
In Software version 2.X the following GPS configuration options are available in the
Installation menu:
GPS TYPE 1 KLN94 and KLN90B Standard RS-232 configuration.
GPS TYPE 2 KLN94 Enhanced configuration. Allows the KLN94 to be configured
for Enhanced RS-232. Curved flight paths can be displayed.
GPS TYPE 3 GX-50/55/60/65 configuration.

8.1.4 RS232 ADC Output
The EFD1000 Display outputs the following computed air data output signals over the
RS-232 bus in Format Z (ADC TYPE 1) and Format C (ADC TYPE 2). Aspen makes no
claim as to the suitability of this data for any purpose:
True Air Speed
Indicated Air Speed
Pressure Altitude
OAT (Format Z only)
Wind Direction
Wind speed
Rate of Turn (Format Z only)
Vertical speed
Heading data

8.1.5 ARINC 429 GPS Inputs
The EFD receives the following labels on pins (16, 17) and (20, 21) when transmitted
from a GPS receiver. ARINC 429 word definitions are implemented per GAMA Pub 11.
The GPS input ports can be configured either HIGH or LOW but must match the VLOC
input port speed.

ARINC Label(s) EFD Parameter

074 Data Record Header
075, bit 9 set OBS/HOLD Mode
075, bit 9 not set Auto Course Select
Label 100, bits 13(0)
and 12(1)
CDI Select (GPS) [GNAV installation only]
Label 100, bits 13(1)
and 12(0)
CDI Select (VLOC) [GNAV installation only]
Label 114 GPS Desired Track
Label 115 GPS Waypoint Bearing
Label 116 GPS Crosstrack
Label 117 GPS Vertical Deviation
Label 147 GPS Magnetic Variation
Label 121 GPS Horizontal Command
Label 251 GPS Distance to Go
Label 252 GPS Time to Go
Label 261G, bits 25
(0), 26(0), 27(0)
GPS ENROUTE
Label 261G, bits
25(1), 26(0), 27(0)
GPS TERMINAL
Label 261G, bits
25(0), 26(1), 27(0)
GPS APPR Active
Label 300 GPS Mag. Station Decl, Wpt Type, Class
Label 303 GPS Message Length, Type, Number
Label 304 GPS Message Characters 1-3
Label 305 GPS Message Characters 4-6
Label 306 GPS NAV Waypoint Latitude Full precision
Label 307 GPS NAV Waypoint Longitude Full precision
Labels 310 GPS Present Position Latitude
Label 311 GPS Present Position Longitude
Label 275, bit 23 GPS TO Flag
Label 275, bit 24 GPS FROM Flag
Label 275, bit 11 set GPS WPT ALERT
Label 275, bit 22 set GPS INTEGRITY
Label 275, bit 27 set GPS MSG ALERT
ARINC Label(s) EFD Parameter

Label 312 GPS Ground Speed
Label 313 GPS Track
Label 326 GPS Lateral Deviation Scale Factor full precision
Label 327 GPS Vertical Deviation Scale Factor full precision
Label 330 GPS FPL Curved CONIC Arc Inbound Course
Label 331 GPS FPL Curved CONIC Arc Radius
Label 332 GPS FPL Curved CONIC ARC Course Change Angle
Label 333 GPS FPL Curved Airport Runway Azimuth
Label 334 GPS FPL Curved Airport Runway Length
Label 335 GPS FPL Curved Holding Pattern Azimuth
Label 340 GPS FPL Curved Procedure Turn Azimuth
Table 8.1 - EFD A429 GPS Input

8.1.6 ARINC 429 VLOC Input
The EFD receives the following labels on Pins (18, 19) and (22, 23) when transmitted
from a VLOC receiver. The VLOC input ports can be configured either HIGH or LOW but
must match the GPS input port speed.

ARINC (Label) EFD Parameter

Label 34 Tuned Frequency
Label 34, bit 14 set ILS Energize
Label 173 Localizer deviation and validity flags
Label 174 Glide Slope deviation and validity flags
Label 222 VOR Omni bearing
Table 8.2 - EFD A429 VLOC Input
8.1.7 ARINC 429 Output
The EFD1000 transmits the following labels on pins 26 and 27 (only when the
installation is configured for no ACU) for ancillary equipment that require low speed
ARINC 429 Heading, OBS, and Air Data. Note - if an ACU is installed then the
connections will be made at ACU P3 pins 4 and 5 for heading and selected course.
Aspen makes no claim as to the suitability of this data for any purpose.
ARINC Label EFD Parameter Software Version
Label 100 Selected Course 2.0 and subsequent
Label 320 Magnetic Heading 2.0 and subsequent
Label 203 Pressure Altitude 2.0 and subsequent
Label 204 Pressure Altitude (Baro corrected) 2.0 and subsequent
Label 210 True Airspeed 2.0 and subsequent
Table 8.3 - EFD1000 A429 GPS Output
8.2 ACU Electrical Specifications
8.2.1 Power Input
Nominal Input: 14Vdc or 28Vdc
Operating Range: 11Vdc to 32Vdc
8.2.2 Decision Height (DH) Input
A differential input from the DH output of a radar altimeter.
DH on: Difference between +DH and DH greater than 5Vdc
DH off: Difference between +DH and DH less than 1Vdc
Load: 10000 ohms +DH to -DH
8.2.3 VLOC Receiver
NAV Composite Input
An input connected to the composite output of a VHF Navigation receiver.

Nominal Input: 0.5Vrms VOR
0.35Vrms Localizer
Input Impedance: 10K ohms
ILS Energize Discrete Input
Low impedance to ground supplied from a Navigation receiver when it is tuned to a
localizer frequency.

Active: Less than 500 ohms to ground or less than 1.5Vdc
Inactive: Open circuit sinking less than 1 ma to ground at 28Vdc

Glide Slope Deviation Input
A low level differential input that accepts a glide slope signal from an external VHF Nav
receiver.

Input Range: 150mVdc full scale
Max Input Range: 300mVdc
Load: 1000 ohm

Glide Slope Flag Input
A low level valid input from an external VHF Navigation receiver.

Valid: Greater than 260mV across a 1000 ohm load
Invalid: Less than 100mV across a 1000 ohm load

8.2.4 GPS Receiver
OBS Sine, Cosine, Rotor
An OBS resolver output for GPS receivers that require an OBS input. The resolver
output electrical zero is set to -60 (300 ORZ) for compatibility with most legacy
resolvers. The ACU accommodates OBS excitation with DC offset.

Excitation Amplitude: 26Vac max (H to C)
Excitation Frequency: 20Hz to 5000Hz
Output Format: Sine (D and E), Cosine (F and G)
Output Gradient: Excitation * 0.408 (26Vac in = 10.6Vac out)
DC Offset: 0Vdc to +5Vdc (Offset applied to Rotor C)

TO/ FROM FLAG Input
Differential input from a GPS receiver indicating whether flying TO or FROM the active
waypoint.

TO the waypoint: +40mV or greater
FROM the waypoint: -40mV or greater

LEFT/ RIGHT Input
Differential input from a GPS receiver indicating LEFT or RIGHT of GPS course.

Load: 1000 ohm

Lateral Flag Input
Validity flag from the GPS receiver indicating valid LEFT and RIGHT data.

Valid: 260mV to 800mVdc
Invalid: Less than 260mVdc

Vertical Deviation Input
Differential input from a GPS receiver indicating a fly UP or DOWN command.

Load: 1000 ohm

Vertical Deviation Flag Input
Validity flag from the GPS receiver indicating valid UP and DOWN data.

Valid: 260mV to 800mVdc
Invalid: Less than 260mVdc

OBS/ LEG (HOLD) Input
Active low discrete input from a GPS receiver when in the OBS or HOLD mode.

APPR Active Input
Active low discrete input from a GPS receiver when approach mode is activated.

FCS-LOC Engage Input
Active low discrete input from a GPS receiver when approach is selected.

8.2.5 Autopilot
Lateral Deviation Output
A low level lateral deviation output that is connected to an autopilot lateral deviation
(RT/LT) input. The low side of the differential output is referenced to ground. Before
connecting this output verify the receiving equipments left/right input can
accommodate a ground potential on the low side.
Lateral Deviation: 15mVdc for 10 of course error
Sense: Positive voltage for fly right
Load: Will drive up to three 1000 ohm loads
Lateral Flag Output
A low level valid output to the autopilot indicating the Lateral (LT/RT) signal from the
ACU is valid.

Valid: 0.4 to 0.8Vdc
Invalid: Less than 0.05Vdc
Vertical Deviation Output
A low level vertical deviation output that is connected to an autopilot vertical (UP/DN)
input. The low side of the differential output is referenced to ground.

Output Voltage: 150mVdc nominal, tracks the glide slope deviation input
signal to within 5%
Loading: Up to three 1000 ohm loads

Vertical Flag Output
A low level output to the autopilot indicating the UP/DN from the ACU is valid.

Valid: 0.4 to 0.8Vdc
Invalid: Less than 0.05Vdc

ILS Energize Output
Active low output to an autopilot when an ILS is selected or GPS approach is active.

ILS/GPS APPR Active: Sink to ground
ILS/GPS APPR Inactive: Open

15 Volt Reference Output
An internally generated +15Vdc reference for KI-525 emulation.

Output Voltage: +15Vdc 2Vdc

KI-525A Heading and Course Datum Output
Emulated KI-525A outputs to drive the heading and course datum inputs of an
autopilot.

Reference Input: DC (DC may be supplied by the autopilot or ACU
+15Vdc reference)
Heading Datum zero: zero volts when heading bug on the lubber line.
Heading Datum sense: +voltage when the heading bug is to the right
of the lubber line and ACU DATUM is set to NORMAL in
the configuration.
Course Datum zero: zero volts when heading bug on the lubber line.
Course Datum sense: +voltage when the heading bug is to the right
the configuration.

NSD-360 Heading and Course Datum Output
Emulated NSD-360 outputs to drive the heading and course datum inputs of an
autopilot.

Reference Input: AC or DC reference voltage supplied by autopilot
Heading Datum zero: zero volts plus any offset voltage applied to ACU P3-25
Heading Datum sense: +voltage when the heading bug is to the right
the configuration.
Course Datum zero: zero volts plus any offset voltage applied to ACU P3-25
Course Datum sense: +voltage when the heading bug is to the right
the configuration.

Bendix King Flight Director Input
When the EFD1000 is configured for ACU FD TYPE = 1 the ACU will accept Bendix King
Flight Director output levels emulating the KI-256 Artificial Horizon Indicator.

Cessna ARC Flight Director Input
When the EFD1000 is configured for ACU FD TYPE = 3 the ACU will accept Cessna ARC
Flight Director output levels emulating the G-550 Artificial Horizon Indicator.

NOTE: ACU Software Version A-02-178-1.1 or subsequent is required for the
G- 550A Flight Director emulation.

Century Flight Director Input
When the EFD1000 is configured for ACU FD TYPE = 4 the ACU will accept Century
Flight Director output levels emulating the 52C77 Artificial Horizon Indicator.

NOTE: ACU Software Version A-02-178-1.1 or subsequent is required for the
52C77 Flight Director emulation.

Flight Director Valid Input
A single high level valid discrete supplied by the flight director computer indicating
validity of the command bar signals to the ACU.

Valid: Greater than 5Vdc
Invalid: Less than 2Vdc

Flight Director Engaged Input
A single high level valid discrete indicating the pilot has engaged the flight director.

Engaged: Greater than 5Vdc
Disengaged: Less than 2Vdc

Heading Valid Output
Active low discrete output indicating the PFD directional gyro is valid.

Valid: Sinks to ground
Invalid: Open

GPS Selected Output
Active low discrete output indicating GPS1 or GPS2 is the current coupled sensor on the
HSI.

GPS coupled: Sinks to ground
GPS not coupled: Open

8.2.6 ARINC 429 Output
The ACU transmits the following labels on P3 pins 4 and 5 for GPS receivers and
systems that require ARINC 429 magnetic heading and selected course.

ARINC
Label
PFD Data Rate
(ms)
Software Version
Label 100 Selected Course 200 2.0 and subsequent
Label 320 Magnetic Heading 200 2.0 and subsequent
Table 8.4 - ACU A429 Output
8.3 EFD Pin Out
Pin Number Name Input / Output Function
1 POWER - Main DC power input for the unit
2 POWER -
3 POWER -
4 GND - Main DC ground for the unit
5 GND -
6 GND -
7 Digital_Discrete OUTPUT Tone Alert (PFD)/Reversion Relay (MFD)
8 RS232_RX1 INPUT RS232 RX1 (115kb)
9 RS232_RX2 INPUT RS232 RX2
10 RS232_RX3 INPUT RS232 RX3
11 RS232RX4 INPUT RS232 RX4
12 RS232RX5 INPUT RS232 RX5
13 RS232_TX1 OUTPUT RS232 TX1
16 ARINC_RX1A INPUT ARINC Receiver 1
17 ARINC_RX1B INPUT ARINC Receiver 1
26 ARINC_TX1A OUTPUT ARINC Transmitter 1
27 ARINC_TX1B OUTPUT ARINC Transmitter 1
28 Reserved - Future Expansion
29 Reserved -
30 RS232_TX0 OUTPUT RS232 TX
31 RS232_RX0 INPUT RS232 RX0 (115kb)
32 RSM_C - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
33 RSM_D - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
34 RSM_E - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
35 RSM_F - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
36 RSM_G - RSM data (EFD1000 only)
37 Reserved - Future Expansion
38 -
39 -
40 -
41 CONFIG_A - Configuration Module connection
42 CONFIG_B -
43 CONFIG_C -
44 CONFIG_D -
Table 8.5 - PFD/MFD Pin Out


Figure 8.1 PFD/MFD Connector (as viewed from rear of unit)

8.4 RSM Pin Out
1 RSM_A - RSM Connection
2 RSM_B - RSM Connection
3 RSM_C - RSM Connection
4 RSM_D - RSM Connection
5 RSM_E - RSM Connection
6 RSM_F - RSM Connection
7 RSM_G - RSM Connection

Table 8.6 - RSM Pin Out

Male Pin Side Solder Cup Side

Figure 8.2 - RSM Mating Connector Install Side

8.5 Configuration Module Pin Out
1 Config_A - CM Connection
2 Config_B - CM Connection
3 Config_D - CM Connection
4 Config_C - CM Connection
5 Config_S - Shield Ground
Table 8.7 - Configuration Module Pin Out

Figure 8.3 - Configuration Module Connector (Install side)

8.6 ACU Pin Out
J1-1 429RX2A INPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Receive A
J1-2 429RX2B INPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Receive B
J1-3 PWR-COM - Power Common
J1-4 GPS+LT INPUT GPS Lateral Dev Input (-)
J1-5 GPS-LATFLG INPUT GPS Lateral Flag Input (-)
J1-6 GPS+DN INPUT GPS Vertical Dev Input (-)
J1-7 GPS+FR INPUT GPS TO/FROM Input
J1-8 GPS-VERTFLG INPUT GPS Vertical Dev Flag (-)
J1-9 Reserved - Reserved
J1-10 +11 to 32Vdc - Aircraft Primary Power
J1-11 GPS+RT INPUT GPS Lateral Dev Input (+)
J1-12 GPS+LATFLG INPUT GPS Lateral Flag Input (+)
J1-13 GPS+UP INPUT GPS Vertical Dev Input (+)
J1-14 GPS+TO INPUT GPS TO/FROM Input
J1-15 GPS+VERTFLG INPUT GPS Vertical Flag (+)
Table 8.8 - ACU J1 Pin Out

Figure 8.4-ACU J1 Connector (as viewed from front of unit)

J2-1 COMPOSITE INPUT VOR/LOC Composite input
J2-2 /ILS-ENERGIZE INPUT Active Low input from VHF Nav Rx
J2-3 /Spare-Disc1 INPUT Spare Discrete Input
J2-4 /BACK-CRS-OUT
OUTPUT Open collector output to drive the back
course sense circuit of an autopilot
J2-5 /ILS-ENERGIZE-OUT
OUTPUT Active Low Output when ILS Selected or
GPS Appr Active
J2-6 /FCS-LOC-IN INPUT Low Input from GPS when Appr Selected
J2-7 /OBS-LEG-IN
INPUT Active Low from GPS when GPS OBS
mode selected
J2-8 -DH INPUT Differential DH input
J2-9 FD-ENGAGED
INPUT Flight Director Engaged (command bars
in view when active)
J2-10 FD-ROLL2 INPUT Roll input for ARC and Bendix
J2-11 +VLOCFLG-OUT OUTPUT Valid VHF Nav VOR or Localizer signal
J2-12 +GS-IN INPUT Glideslope deviation from VHF Nav Rx
J2-13 +GSFLG-IN INPUT Glideslope flag from VHF Nav Rx
J2-14 FD-PITCH-COM INPUT Pitch Signal common for all FD types
J2-15 FD-ROLL-COM INPUT Roll Signal common for all FD types
J2-16 +UP OUTPUT Vertical output to autopilot (H)
J2-17 +VERT-FLG OUTPUT Vertical output flag (H)
J2-18 +RT OUTPUT Lateral deviation output
J2-19 ACU #1/#2 INPUT Spare Discrete Input
J2-20 COMPOSITE-COM - VOR/LOC common
J2-21 Reserved - Spare Discrete Input
J2-22 Reserved - Spare Discrete Input
J2-24 APPR-ACT
INPUT Active Low input from GPS when GPS
approach mode activated
J2-25 HEADING VALID OUTPUT Active Low Output when Heading Valid
J2-26 +DH INPUT Differential +DH Input
J2-27 FD-VALID INPUT Flight Director Active High valid
J2-28 FD-PITCH2 INPUT Pitch Input for ARC Flight Director
J2-29 Reserved -
J2-30 -VLOCFLG-OUT - Common
J2-31 -GS-IN INPUT Glideslope deviation from VHF Nav Rx
J2-32 -GSFLG-IN INPUT Glideslope flag from VHF Nav Rx
J2-33 FD-PITCH1 INPUT Pitch Input for Century and Bendix FD
J2-34 FD-ROLL1 INPUT Roll Input for Century FD
J2-35 +DN OUTPUT Vertical output to autopilot (L)
J2-36 -VERT-FLG OUTPUT Vertical output flag (L)
J2-37 +LT OUTPUT Lateral deviation output

Figure 8.5 ACU J2 Connector (as viewed from front of unit)

J3-1 429RX1A INPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Receive A
J3-2 429TX1A OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Transmit A
J3-3 CRS-DATUM OUTPUT Course Datum output
J3-4 429TX2A OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Transmit A
J3-5 429TX2B OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 2 Transmit B
J3-6 OBS SIN - OUTPUT Sin of selected course angle (L)
J3-7 OBS COS - OUTPUT Cos of selected course angle (L)
J3-8 ROTOR C OUTPUT OBS sin/cos excitation (L)
J3-9 +15V-EXT-OUT OUTPUT Internal +15Vdc reference
J3-10 SIGNAL-COM - Signal ground
J3-11 HDG/CRS-COM - Signal ground
J3-14 429RX1B INPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Receive B
J3-15 429TX1B OUTPUT ARINC 429 Port 1 Transmit B
J3-16 SIGNAL-COM - Signal ground
J3-17 GPS SELECTED
OUTPUT Active Low signal to drive GPS and
Autopilot inputs.
J3-18 OBS SIN + OUTPUT Sin of selected course angle (H)
J3-19 OBS COS + OUTPUT Cos of selected course angle(H)
J3-20 ROTOR H INPUT OBS sin/cos excitation (H)
J3-21 ARINC-HDG-CRS-EXT
- 26Vac reference to emulate an ARINC
synchro interface
J3-22 HDG-DATUM OUTPUT Heading Datum output
J3-23 HDG-CRS-DATUM-EXT INPUT Heading/Course Datum excitation input
J3-25 HDG-CRS-OFST
INPUT Heading/Course Datum excitation
offset input


Figure 8.6 -ACU J3 Connector (as viewed from front of unit)

9 Installation Wiring Diagrams
The following Section contains wiring diagrams for common interfacing equipment to the PFD,
MFD, ACU, RSM, and Configuration Module. Although the list of interfacing equipment is quite
extensive it does not cover all compatible equipment. For interfaces that are installed but not
shown it is required by the ICAs that a drawing be made and inserted into Appendix D of this
document. All other drawings used from this section by the installer must be copied and inserted
into Appendix D.
There will be some GPS receivers not shown on these drawings that will be compatible with the
EFD1000 system. The EFD1000 is compatible with ARINC 429, RS-232, and analog GPS receivers.
For flight plan information to be presented on the PFD an RS-232 or ARINC 429 interface is
required. Should an RS-232 or ARINC 429 bus not be available or incompatible then the GPS can
still be connected to the EFD1000 system using analog signals to drive the HSI deviation
indications. In this situation, GPS flight plan data will not be available. It will be up to the installer
to verify the interface is fully functional by performing a complete ground check of the system.
There are also VLOC receivers not shown in these drawings that can be connected either by ARINC
429 to the PFD or through VOR composite video into the ACU. Any radio with a nominal output of
0.5Vrms VOR or 0.35Vrms Localizer composite video format are supported. It will be up to the
installer to verify the interface is fully functional by performing a complete ground check of the
system.
The EFD1000 Pro with ACU emulates a Bendix King KI-525A and NSD-360A HSI by providing
outputs for HDG Datum and CRS Datum to an autopilot. The EFD1000 is compatible with any
autopilot that is compatible with a KI-525A or NSD-360A HSI. Should connections be made to an
autopilot not shown in these drawings the installer must verify the interface is fully functional by
performing a complete ground and flight check of the system per the autopilot manufacturers
installation manual or maintenance instructions.
The EFD1000 Pro with ACU also emulates the Bendix King KI-254/256, ARC G-550A, and Century
52C77 flight director indicators. All autopilots that output flight director signals that are KI-
254/256, G-550A, or 52C77 compatible are also compatible with the EFD1000 flight director
display.
To begin planning the electrical installation, select the drawing in the list below preceded by an *
that matches the aircraft equipment configuration, and then wire as shown. GPS1, GPS2, NAV1,
NAV2, and the autopilot are options on each page. Simply make the connections to the equipment
you plan to install and omit the units from the drawing you dont. You will configure the system
later based upon the Configuration ID#s shown in the Configuration Matrix on each drawing.
Aspen Avionics Inc. uses the terms GNAV when referring to a combination GPS/VLOC Receiver
with an integral CDI source select (i.e., GNS-430), GPS for a standalone GPS Receiver (i.e., GNS-
400, KLN90B), and VLOC for stand alone VOR/Localizer equipment (i.e. KX-155, SL30).
NOTE: Although the drawings show the complete interface of connected equipment to the
EFD1000 System, they do not show the complete connections for non-EFD1000
equipment. Please consult other manufacturers reference documents for their complete
interface to the aircraft.
List of Wiring Diagrams PFD
Figure Installation Drawing
9.1 EFD1000 Main Connections
9.2 ACU Main Power
9.3 Decision Height (DH)
*9.4 Pilot Digital RS-232 Interface
*9.5 Pilot Digital ARINC 429 Interface
*9.6 Pro Single Digital with Tracker or No autopilot
*9.7 Pro Single Digital with autopilot
*9.8 Pro Digital/Analog Mix with and w/o autopilot
*9.9 Pro Dual Digital without autopilot
*9.9A Pro Dual Digital with autopilot
*9.10 Pro ARINC 429 GPS & Dual Analog VLOC with and w/o autopilot
*9.11 Pro Legacy GPS & Analog VLOC with and w/o autopilot
9.11A This Figure does not apply to SW v2.0 and later
9.11B This Figure does not apply to SW v2.0 and later
9.12 KLN89/B & KLN94 Interface
9.13 KLN-90/A/B Interface
9.14 Apollo GX-55/65 Interface
9.15 Analog NAV/VLOC Interface
9.15A Analog Narco and ARC Navigation Radio Interface
9.16 KI-525A Emulation Bendix/King autopilots
9.17 S-TEC autopilot interface
9.17A S-TEC KI-525A Emulation
9.17B S-TEC NSD-360A Emulation
9.18 Century autopilot interface
9.18A NSD-360A Emulation Century 21/31/41/2000
9.18B NSD-360A Emulation Century IIB/III 1C388/M & 1C388-2
9.18C NSD-360A Emulation Century IIB/II 1C388-3
9.18D NSD-360A Emulation Century IV
9.19 Cessna ARC autopilot interface
9.19A NSD-360A Emulation Cessna ARC 300B/400B/800B
9.19B NSD-360A Emulation Cessna ARC 300A
9.20 KI-256 Flight Director Emulation Bendix/King
9.21 52C77 Flight Director Emulation Century 41/2000
9.21A 52C77 Flight Director Emulation Century IV
9.22 G-550A Flight Director Emulation ARC
9.23 KI-256 Flight Director Emulation S-TEC 55/55X
9.23A KI-256 Flight Director Emulation S-TEC 60/65
9.24 Back-Up NAV Indicator (internal converter)
9.25 Back-Up NAV Indicator (OBS Resolver)
9.26 Back-Up NAV/GPS Indicator (OBS Resolver)
9.27 Additional Configuration Notes
9.28 Traffic/XM Wx/WX-500/ADC Sensor Interfaces

List of Wiring Diagrams MFD
Two Generic drawings (Figure 9.29 and 9.30) are provided that will work with any interface. It will
be necessary to use other drawings from Section 9 to complete the wiring interface to the GPS
receiver, NAV receiver, and ACU.
Two configuration specific drawings (Figure 9.31 and 9.32) are provided that show the most
common system configurations. These drawings show the complete NAV/GPS and ACU interfaces
to the EFD1000 and EFD500 systems.

Figure Installation Drawing
9.29 GENERIC: PFD with MFD
9.30 GENERIC: PFD with MFD1000 and MFD500
9.31 PFD with MFD, GNAV1 and Analog NAV2 and/or GPS2
9.32 PFD with MFD, GNAV1 and GNAV2
1 P
1
P
O
W
E
R
P
O
W
E
R
2
P
O
W
E
R
3
G
N
D
4
G
N
D
5
G
N
D
6
E
F
D
1
0
0
0

C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R

4
4

P
I
N

F

D
-
S
U
B
P
/
N

D
D
4
4
F
1
0
0
0
0
R
S
M
_
A
3
0
R
S
M
_
B
3
1
R
S
M
_
C
3
2
R
S
M
_
D
3
3
R
S
M
_
E
3
4
R
S
M
_
F
3
5
R
S
M
_
G
3
6
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
A
7
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
B
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
C
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
D
12345
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
A
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
B
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
D
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
C
C
O
N
F
I
G
_
S
S
I
N
G
L
E

U
N
S
H
I
E
L
D
E
D
M
I
L
-
W
-
2
2
7
5
9

o
r

E
q
u
i
v
.
G
R
O
U
N
D

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
L

W
I
R
E

L
E
N
G
T
H

1
2

I
N
C
H
E
S

M
A
X
C
O
N
F
I
G
U
R
A
T
I
O
N

M
O
D
U
L
E
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R

M
o
le
x

P
/
N

5
0
-
5
7
-
9
0
4
5
B
R
E
A
K
E
R
W
i
r
e

T
y
p
e
s

i
n

t
h
i
s

M
a
n
u
a
l
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
_
O
U
T
S
I
N
G
L
E

S
H
I
E
L
D
E
D

2
2

A
W
G
M
2
7
5
0
0
-
2
2
S
D
1
T
2
3

o
r

E
q
u
i
v
.
T
W
I
S
T
E
D

S
H
I
E
L
D
E
D

P
A
I
R

2
2

A
W
G
M
2
7
5
0
0
-
2
2
S
D
2
T
2
3

o
r

E
q
u
i
v
.
4
1
4
2
4
4
4
3
C
H
A
S
S
I
S
S
T
U
D
1
A
l
l

w
i
r
e
s

i
n

t
h
i
s

m
a
n
u
a
l

a
r
e

2
2

A
W
G

u
n
l
e
s
s

o
t
h
e
r
w
i
s
e

n
o
t
e
d
.
2
C
o
n
n
e
c
t

g
r
o
u
n
d

l
u
g
s

t
o

a
i
r
f
r
a
m
e

g
r
o
u
n
d

w
i
t
h

a
s

s
h
o
r
t

a

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r

a
s

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e
.
C
o
n
n
e
c
t

t
o

a
i
r
f
r
a
m
e

g
r
o
u
n
d

w
i
t
h

a
s

s
h
o
r
t

a

c
o
n
d
u
c
t
o
r

a
s

p
o
s
s
i
b
l
e
.
3
E
F
D
1
0
0
0

M
F
D
1
4
-
2
8
V
d
c

B
a
t
t
e
r
y

B
u
s
1234567
R
S
M
_
A
R
S
M
_
B
R
S
M
_
C
R
S
M
_
D
R
S
M
_
E
R
S
M
_
F
R
S
M
_
G
7

C
O
N
D
U
C
T
O
R

S
H
I
E
L
D
E
D

W
I
R
E
R
S
M

S
H
I
E
L
D
I
N
G

E
X
T
E
N
D
S

W
I
T
H
I
N

B
A
C
K

S
H
E
L
L
S
H
I
R
O
S
E

S
R
3
0
-
1
0
P
F
-
7
P
(
7
1
)
T
I
N
N
E
D

C
O
P
P
E
R

O
V
E
R
B
R
A
I
D

D
A
B
U
R
N

P
/
N

2
3
5
0
-
X

o
r

E
q
u
i
v
.
C
O
N
N
E
C
T

T
O

B
O
L
T

O
N

P
F
D

B
R
A
C
K
E
T

(
B
A
C
K
S
I
D
E

O
F

P
A
N
E
L
)

-
A
I
R
F
R
A
M
E

G
R
O
U
N
D
G
R
O
U
N
D

S
T
R
A
P
8

I
N
C
H
E
S
P
ig
t
a
il
A
s
s
e
m
b
ly
A
-
0
8
-
1
4
4
-
0
0
-
A
2
0

A
W
G
2
0

A
W
G
2
4

A
W
G
2
4

A
W
G
2
2

o
r

2
4

A
W
G

X

7

W
I
R
E
S

P
F
D

t
o

R
S
M
S
H
I
E
L
D

T
E
R
M
I
N
A
T
E
S

T
O

M
E
T
A
L

C
L
A
M
P
E
R

W
I
T
H
I
N

C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
R
S
M

C
O
N
N
E
C
T
O
R
4
4
N
o
t
e

w
i
r
e
s

c
r
o
s
s

a
n
d

a
r
e

n
o
t
i
n

n
u
m
e
r
i
c
a
l

o
r
d
e
r
H
I
R
F
/

L
I
G
H
T
N
I
N
G

O
V
E
R

B
R
A
I
D

O
R

D
O
U
B
L
E

S
H
I
E
L
D
E
D

W
I
R
E
B
l
a
c
k
B
r
o
w
n
O
r
a
n
g
e
R
e
d
5
5
E
a
c
h

E
F
D

m
u
s
t

u
s
e

i
t
s

o
w
n

i
n
d
i
v
i
d
u
a
l

s
w
i
t
c
h

f
o
r

r
e
d
u
n
d
a
n
c
y
.

L
a
b
e
l

a
c
c
o
r
d
i
n
g
l
y
.

P
F
D

m
a
y

b
e

l
a
b
e
l
e
d

P
F
D

i
n

a

P
F
D

o
n
l
y

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
.
W
h
it
e
/
B
la
c
k
W
h
it
e
/
R
e
d
W
h
it
e
/
O
r
a
n
g
e
W
h
it
e
/
Y
e
llo
w
W
h
it
e
/
G
r
e
e
n
W
h
it
e
/
B
lu
e
W
h
it
e
6
6
P
F
D

m
a
y

u
s
e

o
p
t
i
o
n
a
l

s
o
n
a
l
e
r
t
.

M
F
D

i
s

n
o

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
.
E
F
D
1
0
0
0

o
n
l
y
7
T
h
e

E
F
D
1
0
0
0

i
s

n
o
r
m
a
l
l
y

s
h
i
p
p
e
d

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

i
n
t
e
r
n
a
l

b
a
t
t
e
r
y

d
i
s
c
o
n
n
e
c
t
e
d
.

C
o
n
n
e
c
t

t
h
e

b
a
t
t
e
r
y

p
r
i
o
r

t
o

i
n
s
t
a
l
l
a
t
i
o
n
.

S
e
e

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

6
.
8
.
1
.
E
F
D
5
0
0

M
F
D
S
o
n
a
le
r
t

-
P
F
D
7
.
5
A

(
E
F
D
1
0
0
0
)
5
A

7
.
5
A

(
E
F
D
5
0
0
)
E
F
D
1
0
0
0

P
F
D
8
8
P
F
D

R
S
M

a
n
d

M
F
D

R
S
M

w
i
r
i
n
g

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
s
o
l
a
t
e
d
/
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e

f
r
o
m

e
a
c
h

o
t
h
e
r
.

A
l
s
o

P
F
D

R
S
M

w
i
r
i
n
g

m
u
s
t

b
e

i
s
o
l
a
t
e
d
/
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e

f
r
o
m

E
B
B
5
8

w
i
r
i
n
g
.

S
e
e

S
e
c
t
i
o
n

6
.
5
.
3
.

Figure 9.1 EFD1000/500 Main Connections

Figure 9.2 ACU Input Power

Figure 9.3 Decision Height (DH) Interface

Figure 9.4 PILOT Digital RS232 Interface

Over Braid or
Double Shield
EFD1000
16 429 GPS RX1A
P4001 P5001 P1
46 46 16
429 GPS RX1B
17
47 47 15
Configure Garmin ARINC 429 port for
Low GAMA 429 Graphics w/Int
GNS400 GNS500 GNC300
GPS150
155/165
P1
15
16
1
2
1
Apollo
2001
P1
41
40
ID#1 Description
C
NONE
ID#2
GPS1, No GPS2
No GPS1, No GPS2
NONE
NONE
2 2 2
Over shield or over braid required on this wire
bundle to comply with HIRF & Lightning. Extend
within back shell if possible. Ground at both ends.
3
Configuration Matrix
(see Section 10)
4
Back-up NAV indicator maybe required for IFR
use. Consult manufacturers installation manual.
3
Configure GPS for King EFS 40/50
5
4
Refer to manufacturers documentation to verify
the integration data and for information
regarding checkout procedures. This drawing,
as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
reference only.

Figure 9.5 PILOT Digital ARINC 429 Interface

Figure 9.6 - PRO Single Digital with "Tracker" or no Autopilot Interface
Over Braid or
Double Shield
Over Braid or
Double Shield
EFD1000
16 429 GPS RX1A
P4001 P4006 P5006 P5001
46 46
24
429 GPS RX1B
17 47
24
47
23
GNS430(W)(AW) GNS530(W)(AW)
23
1
2
P1
P3
4
5
48(50)
49(51)
48(50)
49(51)
ACU
P3
18
19
26
27 14
1
15
2 VLOC/ACU RX2A
VLOC/ACU RX2B
PFD 429 TX1A
PFD 429 TX1B
Autopilot
See Figure:
9.16 for Bendix King
9.17 for S-TEC
9.18 for Century
9.19 for Cessna ARC
9.20 9.23A Flight Director
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
429 RX1B
429 RX1A
429 TX1B
429 TX1A A
U
T
O
P
I
L
O
T
429 RX2A
429 TX2A
429 TX2B
429 RX2B
1
ID#1 Description
B
ID#2
NONE
GNS430, No GPS2
No NAV2
With Autopilot
2
GNAV
Use pins 48 & 49 or 50 & 51 not both.
3
1
*GNS530 and GNS480 use same config
as GNS430
1
4
2
3 3
(see Section 10)
CNX-80
GNS-480
P5
4
24
5
25
8
28
2
6
Pins 4 & 24 may be swapped with pins 5 & 25 if
configured accordingly.
Requires GNS-480 SW v2.3. See Figure 9.27 for GNS-
480 configuration.
5
4
4
5
See Figure 9.27 for GNS-430/530 configuration.
Refer to manufacturers documentation to verify the
integration data and for information regarding
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains
to the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
This drawing is used for a single GNAV and autopilot interface only.
Use Figure 9.8 if adding a second GPS or Analog Nav2 receiver.

Figure 9.7 PRO Single Digital with Autopilot Interface
Over Braid or
Double Shield
Over Braid or
Double Shield
EFD1000
16 429 GPS RX1A
P4001 P4006 P5006 P5001
46 46
24
429 GPS RX1B
17 47
24
47
23
GNS430(W)(AW) GNS530(W)(AW)
23
P3
4
5
48(50)
49(51)
48(50)
49(51)
ACU
P3
18
19
26
27 14
1
15
2 ACU RX4A
ACU RX4B
PFD 429 TX1A
PFD 429 TX1B
Autopilot-optional
See Figure:
9.17 for S-TEC
9.18 for Century
9.19 for Cessna ARC
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
429 RX1B
429 RX1A
429 TX1B
429 TX1A
G
P
S
#
2
I
N
P
U
T
22
23
V
L
O
C
#
2
I
N
P
U
T
A
U
T
O
P
I
L
O
T
Analog VLOC #2 - optional
RS-232/Analog GPS #2 - optional
See Figure:
9.12 for KLN89/B & KLN94
9.13 for KLN-90/A/B
9.14 for GX-50/60 & GX-55/65
429 VLOC RX2A
429 VLOC RX2B
GNAV #1
RS-232 Flight Plan
To
EFD1000
Pin 8
429 TX2A
429 TX2B
1
Optional
Back-Up
Nav
Indicator
See Figure 9.24, 9.25, 9.26 for
Back-Up NAV recommendations.
2
3
ID#1 Description
A
A
A
ID#2
D
F
H
GNS430, No GPS2,
NAV2
GNS430, GPS2,
No NAV2
GNS430, GPS2,
NAV2
4
See Figure 9.15 for:
KX-155(A) &165(A)
KN-53
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
SL-30
Use pins 48 & 49 or 50 & 51 not both.
2
*GNS530 and GNS480 use same
config as GNS430
3
1
1
1
Over shield or over braid required on this
wire bundle to comply with HIRF &
Lightning. Extend within back shell if
possible. Ground at both ends.
5
3
(see Section 10)
CNX-80
GNS-480
P5
4
24
5
25
8
28
4
4
See Figure 9.27 for GNS430/530
configuration.
6
Pins 4 & 24 may be swapped with pins
5 & 25 if configured accordingly.
Requires GNS-480 SW v2.3. See Figure
9.27 for GNS-480 configuration.
5 2
Refer to manufacturers documentation to
verify the integration data and for
information regarding checkout procedures.
This drawing, as it pertains to the non-
Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
This drawing is used for a single GNAV with a GPS2 and/or NAV2 and with
or w/o autopilot interface. Use Figure 9.7 if No GPS2 and No Analog Nav2 receiver.

Figure 9.8 PRO Digital & Analog Mix with and w/o Autopilot Interface

Figure 9.9 - PRO Dual Digital w/o Autopilot Interface

Figure 9.9A PRO Dual Digital with Autopilot

Figure 9.10 PRO ARINC 429 GPS & Analog VLOC (1 or 2) with and w/o Autopilot
Over Braid or
Double Shield
Over Braid or
Double Shield
Over Braid or
Double Shield
EFD1000
GPS/VLOC RX2A
GPS/VLOC RX2B
ACU #1
P3
18
19
26
27
14
1
15
2
PFD 429 TX1A
PFD 429 TX1B
Autopilot - optional
See Figure:
9.17 for S-TEC
9.18 for Century
9.19 for Cessna ARC
429 RX1B
429 RX1A
429 TX1B
429 TX1A
G
P
S
I
N
P
U
T
22
23
A
U
T
O
P
I
L
O
T
Analog VLOC #2
RS-232/Analog GPS #1
See Figure:
9.13 for KLN-90/A/B
9.14 for GX-50/60 & GX-55/65
429 VLOC RX4A
429 VLOC RX4B
RS-232 Flight Plan
To
EFD1000
Pin 8
Analog VLOC #1
ACU #2
14
1
15
2
P3
429 RX1A
429 RX1B
Optional
Back-Up
Nav
Indicator
Optional
Back-Up
Nav
Indicator
V
L
O
C
#
2
V
L
O
C
#
1
429 TX1B
429 TX1A
Autopilot must be connected to ACU #1
See Figure 9.24, 9.25, 9.26 for Back-Up
NAV recommendations. If no GPS installed then
One backup NAV indicator is required.
2
2
1
2
3
4
Omit ACU #2 if using only 1 Analog Nav.
1
ID#1 Description
G
H
H
ID#2
NONE
NONE
D
GPS1, No NAV1,
No NAV2
GPS1,NAV1,
No NAV2
GPS1, NAV1, NAV2
KX-155(A) &165(A)
KN-53
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
SL-30
KX-155(A) &165(A)
KN-53
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
SL-30
1
1
5
3
4
(see Section 10)
1
Refer to manufacturers documentation to verify
the integration data and for information regarding
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains
to the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9.11 PRO RS232 GPS & Analog VLOC (1 or 2) with and w/o Autopilot


Figure 9.11A CNX-80/GNS-480 RS232 with and w/o NAV2 & Autopilot

GNS480/CNX80 RS-232 connections are Not
Authorized in EFD1000 software version 2.X. Use
ARINC 429 connections.

Figure 9.11B CNX-80/GNS-480 RS232 and Analog Interface

GNS480/CNX80 RS-232 connections are Not
Authorized in EFD1000 software version 2.X. Use
ARINC 429 connections.

Over Braid or
Double Shield
EFD1000
9 (8) RS232 IN PORT 2 (1)
P3
19
7
ACU
GPS +TO
/FCS-LOC
/OBS-LEG
/APPR ACTIVE
OBS COS +
OBS COS -
1
2
KLN89/B
KLN94
6
18
20
8
36
37
35
34
P2
6
7
24
17
18
P1
4
13
6
12
5
15
11
13
14
12
10
OBS SIN -
OBS SIN +
ROTOR (H)
ROTOR (C)
APPR ACTIVE
FCS LOC /ENG
RS-232 OUT
OBS RESOLVER COS
OBS RESOLVER OUT
AC GROUND
OBS RESOLVER SIN
+TO
+FROM
LAT FLG +
D-BAR +RT
D-BAR +LT
GPS +UP
GPS +RT
GPS +LT
GPS LAT FLG +
GPS LAT FLG -
GPS DISPLAYED
P1
P2
Vert +UP
Vert +DN
12
33
32
P1
31
11
13
8
11
7
14
LAT FLG -
Vert FLG +
Vert FLG -
GPS +DN
GPS Vert FLG +
GPS +FR
GPS Vert FLG -
N/C
P2
P1
17 /GPS MODE SEL
Over shield or over braid
required on this wire bundle to
comply with HIRF & Lightning.
Extend within back shell if
possible. Ground at both ends.
1
2
ACFT PWR
NO
NC
K1
3
2 GPS selected on PFD requires
open to GPS. NAV1 or NAV2
selected on PFD requires
ground to GPS. Use 14V or
28V SPDT relay for K1.
4
KLN-94 may be configured for
Standard RS-232 or Enhanced
RS-232. See Table 5.3 for
corresponding EFD1000 config.
3
Refer to manufacturers
documentation to verify the
integration data and for
information regarding checkout
procedures. This drawing, as it
pertains to the non-Aspen
equipment, is for reference only.
5
Pin 8 may be used provided the
interface does not include XM
Wx
4
Optionally a twisted pair
(22TG2V64 or equiv) may be
used with the second conductor
grounded at both ends.
6
5

Figure 9.12 KLN89B & KLN94 RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface

Figure 9.13 KLN-90/A/B RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface

Figure 9.14 GX-50/60 & GX-55/65 RS232 and Analog to ACU Interface
ACU
1 NAV Composite
P401 P901 A2 A1
H
_
KX155/165 Nav units have dual GS outputs. Use
Numbered or Lettered pins, not both. Use unused
pins independent from those driving a backup NAV
indicator if possible. Otherwise parallel as close to
NAV receiver as possible (see Figure 9.24 & 9.25)
KX155
KX165
KX155A
KX165A
20
2
32
13
31
12
H
8 8
15 - S 15 - S
14 - R
17 - U
16 - T
17 - U
14 - R
16 - T
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Composite GND
/ILS Engage
GS +UP
GS +DN
GS -FLG
GS +FLG
1
1
1
ACU
1 NAV Composite
P532 P1
B
KN-53 SL-30
20
2
32
13
31
12
12
15
32
28
31
13
14
P
R
Composite GND
/ILS Engage
GS +UP
GS +DN
GS -FLG
GS +FLG
1
30
33
37
19
2
2
Glideslope interface is for units with GS option.
3
P2
P2
KX170A/
170B/175B
P171
3
4
See manufacturers documentation for KN-70 and
KN-73 Glideslope connections.
3
_
_
_
_
_
4
2
2
See Figure 9.27 for SL-30 configuration.
If paralleling GS signals with backup NAV indicator
then splice wires as close to NAV receiver as
possible. Do not parallel at back of NAV indicator
(see Figures 9.24 & 9.25)
3
4
Diode required when paralleling ILS Energize wire
with backup NAV indicator. See Figure 9.24. Use
1N4005 or equivalent.
5
4
Diode required when paralleling ILS Energize wire
with backup NAV indicator. See Figure 9.24. Use
1N4005 or equivalent.
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to
the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.
3
checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to
the non-Aspen equipment, is for reference only.

Figure 9.15 Analog NAV Interface


Figure 9.15A Narco and Cessna ARC Navigation Radios

Figure 9.16 KI525A Emulation (Bendix/King autopilot to ACU)

Figure 9.17 STEC Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum)

Figure 9.17A KI525A Emulation (STEC Autopilot)


Figure 9.17B NSD360A Emulation (STEC Autopilot)

Figure 9.18 Century Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum)

Figure 9.18A NSD360A Emulation (Century 21/31/41/2000)
C
F
ROLL EXC
ROLL EXC
A
B
D
E
21
22
3
HDG SIG
ROLL COM
N/C
(
DATUM EXCITATION
HDG DATUM
CRS DATUM
CD33 TO AMP
(connector on Radio Coupler)
PARALLEL WITH
EXISTING WIRES
CD33 TO DG (pigtail)
T1
T2
10K :10K
10K :10K
C1 = .027uF min 50V
L1 = 27mH
The value of R1 can range from 0K to 300K. A value for R1
should be selected that sets the NAV intercept angle at 45
degrees. Consult autopilot manufacturers reference
documents for post install checkout procedures.
P3
ACU
CENTURY 1C-388 & 1C388-M RADIO COUPLERS
(5Khz) 10k
1/4W
10k
1/4W
T1/T2/T3 - Use MAGNETEC TY-141P, DigiKey # 237-1118-ND or equivalent.
L1 - JW Miller PN: 9250A-276-RC, Digikey # M10108-ND or equivalent.
C1 Panasonic ECQE2273KS, Digikey # 2273-ND or equivalent.
ROLL EXC
ROLL EXC
23
22
3
HDG SIG
CRS SIG
DATUM EXCITATION
HDG DATUM
CRS DATUM
T1
T2
10K :10K
10K :10K
P3
ACU
CENTURY 1C-388-2 RADIO COUPLER
(5Khz)
10k
1/4W
10k
1/4W
D
E
A
B
B
T3
ROLL COM
10K :10K
R1
R1
10k
1/4W
This radio coupler does not have CRS Datum interface.
You must upgrade to 1C-388-2 coupler to gain this feature.
Set ACU HSI TYPE = 1
Set ACU DATUM = REVERSED
10 SIGNAL COMMON
10
11
11 CRS/HDG COM
CRS/HDG COM
SIGNAL COMMON
1
1
1
2
2
3
Refer to autopilot manufacturers documentation for autopilot-
side integration information (including autopilot STC compliance
data) and for autopilot and flight director checkout procedures.
This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
reference only.
CD33 TO DG (pigtail)
PARALLEL WITH
EXISTING WIRE
CD33 TO AMP
(connector on Radio Coupler)

Figure 9.18B NSD360A Emulation Century 1C388/M and 1C388-2 Radio Couplers

Figure 9.18C - NSD360A Emulation Century 1C388-3 Radio Coupler

3 CRS DATUM
23
22 49
P3
HDG DATUM
HDG-CRS EXT
48
ACU
CD-66
Century IV
(DC Version)
13
+14Vdc reference
ID496
Computer
(see Section 10)
Refer to autopilot manufacturers documentation for autopilot-side integration
information (including autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot and flight
director checkout procedures. This drawing, as it pertains to the non-Aspen
equipment, is for reference only.
Heading Signal
Course Signal
In order to use this interconnect the ID496 Computer Amplifier must have Roll
Module 1C695-1 installed to be NSD-360 compatible.
1
1
2

Figure 9.18D - NSD-360A Emulation Century IV (DC version)

Figure 9.19 Cessna ARC Autopilot to ACU Interface (minus HDG/CRS Datum)
3
CRS DATUM
17
23
22
11
24
21
_
_
P3
HDG DATUM
CRS/HDG COM
HDG-CRS EXT
_
If the existing DG/HSI is to remain in the aircraft
do not parallel HDG/CRS Datum with ACU.
Cap and Stow at DG/HSI or use switch.
Existing DG installations must make CRS Datum
connection as shown to gain full HSI features.
Remove Jumper from J2-17 to J1-21 if installed.
ACU
J1-P4 J2-P5
CA-550/FD
300B/400B/
800B
When replacing IG-832A/IG-895A
or NSD-360A
(see Section 10)
10
_
2
2
1
3
Refer to autopilot manufacturers documentation for
autopilot-side integration information (including
autopilot STC compliance data) and for autopilot and
flight director checkout procedures. This drawing, as
it pertains to the non-Aspen equipment, is for
reference only.
CA-550/FD J1-24 and J2-17 may have been
4
previously connected to ground if they were unused.
These prior connections must be removed.
3

Figure 9.19A - NSD-360A Emulation (Cessna ARC 300B/400B/800B) IFCS

Figure 9.19B NSD-360A Emulation (Cessna ARC 300A AC & DC)

Figure 9.20 KI-256 Emulation (Bendix King Autopilot)


Figure 9.21 52C77 Emulation (Century 41/2000 Autopilot)

Fi
gure 9.21A 52C77 Emulation (Century IV Autopilot)

Figure 9.22 G550A Emulation (Cessna ARC Autopilot)


Figure 9.23 KI256 Emulation (STEC 55/55X Autopilot)

Figure 9.23A KI256 Emulation (STEC 60/65 Autopilot)

Figure 9.24 Back-up NAV Indicator (Internal Converter)

Figure 9.25 Back-up NAV Indicator (OBS Resolver)


Figure 9.26 Back-up NAV/GPS Indicator (GNS-430/530)


GNS-430/530(W) & GPS-400/500(W)
MAIN ARINC 429 CONFIG Page
IN 1 Low Honeywell EFIS (when using pins 48/49)
IN 2 As required
OUT Low GAMA 429 Graphics w/INT
SDI COMMON
VNAV ENABLE LABELS (W models only)
VOR/LOC/GS ARINC 429 CONFIG Page
SPEED Low RX Low TX
SDI COMMON
Garmin SL-30
The SL-30 can be connected to the EFD1000 in one of two
ways. The Resolver configuration is preferred.
The composite output from the SL-30 to the PFD
will become invalid whenever VOR monitor mode or
localizer back course is selected on the SL-30. The
navigation source will show as failed on the PFD if either of
these two modes is entered and the SL-30 is the selected
navigation source. If connected, the backup NAV indicator
will continue to function if either of these two modes is
selected.
VOR monitor mode or localizer back course
mode are disabled from selection on the SL-30. A backup
NAV indicator (GI-106) cannot be connected without a KN-
72 between the SL-30 and indicator due to the fact that the
OBS resolver inputs become invalid with this configuration.
CNX-80/ GNS-480 (software 2.0 and below)
This configuration is not authorized. The GNS-480 should be upgraded
to software version 2.3 (see below)
GPS 155XL
429 IN = SELECTED COURSE
429 OUT = KING EFS 40/50
KLN-94
MAINTENANCE PAGE 7: *STANDARD RS-232 or
*ENHANCED RS-232
*See Table 5.3 for details
CNX-80/ GNS-480 (software 2.3)
GND MAINT - ARINC 429 SETUP
CH_IN SEL SPEED SDI
2 EFIS LOW SYS1 or SYS2
CH_OUT SEL SPEED SDI
1 *GAMA 429 GFX Int LOW SYS1 or SYS2
2 VOR/ILS LOW SYS1 or SYS2
*GAMA 429 GFX Int this configuration has Flight Plan
information.
GND MAINT MISCELLANEOUS SETUP
CDI SELECT: USE
With this configuration the EFD1000 will read the GNS480 CDI
logic state on the A429 bus and toggle between GPS and VLOC on
the PFD when pressing the GNS480 CDI button.
EFD1000 will use GPS/NAV IDs A and B

Figure 9.27 Additional Configuration Notes


Figure 9.28 Traffic/XM Wx/WX500/ADC Sensor Interfaces
44 PIN
7
D
IG
I
T
A
L
_
O
U
T
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C

4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
ARINC 429
Traffic Sensor
(TAS or TIS)
ARINC 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 OUT A
EWR50
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
WX-500
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
2
1
3
4
5
6
PFD or ACU A429 TX may be connected to the traffic sensor for Label 320
Magnetic Heading only. No traffic control panel functions are output by EFD1000
system.
7
8
9
See the EFD1000 Installation Manual for Sonalert option.
ARINC 429 IN B
ARINC 429 IN A
Existing WX-500 Display
See the existing Displays Installation Manual for specifications.
Existing Traffic Display
See the existing Sensors Installation Manual for pin connections and complete
interface to aircraft.
20
8
22
4
3
1 1
See the EFD1000 Installation Manual for GPS/NAV connections. Parallel
connections to both the PFD and MFD for full reversion capability.
8
8
9
10
RS-232 GPS
9
Note, pre-existing RS232 GPS installations may be connected to PFD pin
8. These must be re-pinned to PFD pin 9 when installing XM weather.
2
EFD1000 MFD
EFD500 MFD
PFD with EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
Carry shielding though all wire splices. RS232 wiring only - Optionally a
twisted pair (22TG2V64 or equiv) may be used with the second conductor
grounded at both ends in lieu of single conductor shown.
See Figure 9.1 for CM and RSM wiring connections
7
7
ARINC 429 TX to the ACU or GPS A429 IN. See the EFD1000 Installation
Manual Figures 9.6 to 9.10 for connections
4
See EWR50 Installation Manual for complete interface to aircraft.
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
6
EFD1000 PFD
44 PIN
7
D
I
G
IT
A
L
_
O
U
T
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
Inter-System Bus Configuration
232 IN PORT 4
EFD1000 MFD* or
EFD500 MFD*
232 OUT PORT 2 EFD
PFD
MFD 500 or
MFD 1000
232 OUT PORT 2
232 IN PORT 5 EFD1000 PFD
EFD
DISPLAY RS232 PORT PORT SETTING
* Set to EFD1000 MFD or EFD500 MFD as per installed

Figure 9.29 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, Generic
EFD500 MFD
44 PIN
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
I
N
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
EFD1000 PFD
44 PIN
7
D
I
G
IT
A
L
_
O
U
T
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
EFD1000 MFD
44 PIN
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
ARINC 429
Traffic Sensor
(TAS or TIS)
ARINC 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 OUT A
EWR50
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
WX-500
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
6
PFD or ACU A429 TX may be connected to the traffic sensor for Label 320
system.
7
8
9
ARINC 429 IN B
ARINC 429 IN A
Existing WX-500 Display
See the existing Displays Installation Manual for specifications.
Existing Traffic Display
See the existing Sensors Installation Manual for pin connections and
complete interface to aircraft.
20
8
22
4
3
1 1 1
8
8
9
10
RS-232 GPS
9
Note, pre-existing RS232 GPS installations may be connected to PFD pin
8. These must be re-pinned to PFD pin 9 when installing XM weather.
2
1
3
4
ARINC 429 TX to the ACU or GPS A429 IN. See the EFD1000 Installation
Manual Figures 9.6 to 9.10 for connections
5
See the EFD1000 Installation Manual Figure 9.1 for Sonalert option.
See the EFD1000 Installation Manual Figures 9.6 to 9.15 for GPS/NAV
connections. Parallel connections to both the PFD and MFD.
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
See Figure 9.1 for CM and RSM wiring connections
7 7 7
2
4
6
10 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
See EWR50 Installation Manual for complete interface to aircraft.
PFD with EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD
232 IN PORT 4 EFD1000 MFD
232 OUT PORT 2
EFD500 MFD PFD
MFD 1000
MFD 500
232 IN PORT 5
EFD
232 OUT PORT 2
EFD1000 PFD 232 IN PORT 5
EFD
232 OUT PORT 2
EFD1000 PFD 232 IN PORT 5
EFD

Figure 9.30 - Three Display System PFD/MFD1000/MFD500, Generic
EFD1000 PFD
44 PIN
7
D
IG
IT
A
L
_
O
U
T
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
EFD1000 MFD
44 PIN
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
P3
ACU
ARINC 429_TX1A 2
ARINC 429_TX1B 15
ARINC 429_RX1A 1
ARINC 429_RX1B 14
ARINC 429_TX2A 4
ARINC 429_TX2B 5
ARINC 429
Traffic Sensor
(TAS or TIS)
ARINC 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 OUT A
EWR50
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
WX-500
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
2
1
3
4
Existing PFD installation may have used pin 8 for the RS232 GPS connection. This
wire must be moved to pin 9 when adding the optional EWR50 XM receiver
5
6
ACU A429 TX2 (pins 4,5) may be connected to the traffic sensor for Label 320
system
7
8
9
See the EFD1000 Installation Manual for Sonalert option
ARINC 429 IN B
ARINC 429 IN A
See the existing Displays Installation Manual for specifications
complete interface to aircraft
20
8
22
4
See Figure 9.2 for ACU power and ground connections
3
This drawing is used for existing PFD installations that wired to Figure 9.8
or have one GNAV with Analog NAV and/or GPS. Other configurations
must use their appropriate drawing.
9
10
10
11
9
PFD with EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD
Config: (1A-2D) GNAV and Analog NAV#2
Config: (1A-2H) GNAV and Analog NAV#2 and RS232 GPS#2
Config: (1A-2F) GNAV and RS232 GPS#2
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
See Figure 9.1 for PFD/MFD power and CM/RSM wiring connections
7 7
PX001 PX006
47
46
23
24
GNS430/530
48(50)
49(51)
_
_
_
_
_
_
Autopilot-optional
See Figure:
9.17 for S-TEC
9.18 for Century
9.19 for Cessna ARC
Analog VLOC #2 - optional
RS-232/Analog GPS #2 - optional
RS-232 Flight Plan
To PFD
and MFD
Pin 9
KX-155(A) &165(A)
KN-53
KX-170A/170B/175/175B
SL-30
See Figure:
9.13 for KLN-90/A/B
9.14 for GX-50/60/55/65
GNS480
P5
24
4
25
5
8
28
GNAV
1
2
5 6
See Figure 9.3 for DH wiring connections
11
11
11
11
11
C
O
N
F
IG
_
A
C
O
N
F
IG
_
B
C
O
N
F
IG
_
C
C
O
N
F
IG
_
D
4
1
4
2
4
3
4
4
C
O
N
F
IG
_
A
C
O
N
F
IG
_
B
C
O
N
F
IG
_
C
C
O
N
F
IG
_
D
4
1
4
2
4
3
4
4
7 7
3
2
R
S
M
_
C
3
3
R
S
M
_
D
3
4
R
S
M
_
E
3
5
R
S
M
_
F
3
6
R
S
M
_
G
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
3
2
R
S
M
_
C
3
3
R
S
M
_
D
3
4
R
S
M
_
E
3
5
R
S
M
_
F
3
6
R
S
M
_
G
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
EFD500 MFD
4
EFD500 installations do not use an RSM.
232 IN PORT 4
EFD1000 MFD* or
EFD500 MFD*
232 OUT PORT 2 EFD
PFD
MFD 500 or
MFD 1000
232 OUT PORT 2
EFD

Figure 9.31 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, GNAV1 and Analog NAV#2 or GPS#2
Configurations (1A-2D) or (1A-2H) or (1A-2F)
EFD1000 PFD
44 PIN
7
D
IG
IT
A
L
_
O
U
T
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
EFD500 MFD
44 PIN
8
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
1
9
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
2
1
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
3
1
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
4
1
2
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
5
1
3
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
1
1
4
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
2
1
5
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
3
2
6
2
7
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
T
X
1
B
1
6
1
7
1
8
1
9
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
2
5
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
1
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
2
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
3
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
4
B
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
A
A
R
IN
C
4
2
9
_
R
X
5
B
P3
ACU
ARINC 429_TX1A 2
ARINC 429_TX1B 15
ARINC 429_RX1A 1
ARINC 429_RX1B 14
ARINC 429_TX2A 4
ARINC 429_TX2B 5
ARINC 429
Traffic Sensor
(TAS or TIS)
ARINC 429 OUT B
ARINC 429 OUT A
EWR50
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
WX-500
RS-232_RX
RS232_TX
2
1
3
4
VLOC #2 wiring is a no connect if GNAV #2 is an A429 GPS only (i.e, GPS400)
5
6
ACU A429 TX2 (pins 4,5) may be connected to the traffic sensor for Label 320
system
7
8
9
See the EFD1000 Installation Manual for Sonalert option
ARINC 429 IN B
ARINC 429 IN A
See the existing Displays Installation Manual for specifications
complete interface to aircraft
20
8
22
4
See Figure 9.2 for ACU power and ground connections
3
This drawing is used for existing PFD installations that are wired to Figure
9.9A or new installations of dual GNAV radios. Other configurations must
use their appropriate drawing
9
10
10
11
9
PFD with EFD1000 or EFD500 MFD
Config: (1B-2A) GNAV #1 and GNAV #2
Config: (1B-2C) GNAV #1 and A429 GPS #2
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
See Figure 9.1 for PFD/MFD power and CM/RSM wiring connections
7 7
PX001 PX006
47
46
23
24
GNS430/530
48(50)
49(51)
_
_
_
_
_
_
GNS480
P5
24
4
25
5
8
28
GNAV #1
See Figure 9.3 for DH wiring connections
11
11
11
11
11
C
O
N
F
IG
_
A
C
O
N
F
IG
_
B
C
O
N
F
IG
_
C
C
O
N
F
IG
_
D
4
1
4
2
4
3
4
4
C
O
N
F
IG
_
A
C
O
N
F
IG
_
B
C
O
N
F
IG
_
C
C
O
N
F
IG
_
D
4
1
4
2
4
3
4
4
7
PX001 PX006
47
46
23
24
GNS430/530
48(50)
49(51)
_
_
_
_
_
_
GNS480
P5
24
4
25
5
8
28
GNAV #2
P1
1
2
11
11
ARINC 429_RX2A
ARINC 429_RX2B
2
5 6
1
3
2
R
S
M
_
C
3
3
R
S
M
_
D
3
4
R
S
M
_
E
3
5
R
S
M
_
F
3
6
R
S
M
_
G
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
EFD1000 MFD
3
2
R
S
M
_
C
3
3
R
S
M
_
D
3
4
R
S
M
_
E
3
5
R
S
M
_
F
3
6
R
S
M
_
G
3
1
R
S
2
3
2
_
R
X
0
3
0
R
S
2
3
2
_
T
X
0
4
EFD500 installations do not use an RSM.
232 IN PORT 4
EFD1000 MFD* or
EFD500 MFD*
232 OUT PORT 2 EFD
PFD
MFD 500 or
MFD 1000
232 OUT PORT 2
EFD

Figure 9.32 - Two Display System PFD/MFD, GNAV1 and GNAV2
Configurations (1B-2A) or (1B-2C)


10 Configuration and Equipment Checkout
Print a copy of Appendix B Installation Final Check Sheet prior to starting any tests.
Log a Pass/Fail on check sheet then sign and date upon completion. Include copy of form in
permanent aircraft records.

NOTE: To avoid damage to the equipment, do not place the EFD1000 Display face down
on the knobs.
The following Test Equipment will be required to complete the remaining steps in the ground test
procedure:
Pitot Static Test Set
NAV/ILS Signal Generator
Digital Multimeter
10.1 Post Installation Wiring Checks
10.1.1 Wiring Verification
a) Do not install the EFD, ACU, RSM or configuration module until instructed to
do so in Section 10.3.
b) Perform a continuity check on all wires between the EFD, ACU, RSM,
Configuration Module and their associated connections per wiring diagrams.
c) Verify over shields or over braids are installed on required wiring bundles.
d) Apply aircraft power and close the EFIS, MFD, and ACU circuit breakers and the
EFIS and MFD master switch if installed.
e) Verify proper voltage on EFD main connector pins 1, 2, and 3 and that there
are proper grounds on pins 4, 5, and 6.
f) If installed, verify proper voltage on ACU P1-10 and ground on P1-3.

10.1.2 Bonding Check FAR 23.867(b)
a) Verify braided bonding strap is installed between EFD ground stud and airframe
ground.
b) Verify EFD mounting bracket is bonded to instrument panel with no greater than 3
milliohms resistance.
c) Verify ACU(s) chassis is bonded to airframe with no greater than 3 milliohms
resistance.
d) Verify RSM base plate or doubler plate is bonded to airframe with no greater than
3 milliohms resistance.
e) Verify EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery mounting bracket (if installed) is bonded
to airframe with no greater than 3 milliohms resistance.
10.2 Database Installation
Each EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD comes with a data card which must be installed
during operation. The EFD1000 PFD does not require a data card. See Section 1 MFD
Database Versions for data card types available.
If the data card is removed a Database Failure message will be shown when the system
loads additional data (normally the aircraft has flown some distance).
The data card contains Terrain, Obstacle, Cultural, and NavData. The NavData, Obstacle,
and Cultural data is available for download on a 28 day cycle from Jeppesen. The Terrain
data cannot be downloaded and ships on the microSD card. Extra and replacement cards
are purchased directly from Jeppesen at 1-800-621-5377 or email
captain@jeppesen.com.
The data card is inserted in the card slot at the base the MFD. The data card (microSD
card) is inserted with the metal contacts facing down and toward the display. The card is
inserted until it is almost flush with the display bezel and locks into place. To remove the
data card simply push in on the card and it will eject part way. It then may be removed
from the MFD.

10.3 Initial System Turn On
Remove power by pulling applicable circuit breakers. Install all EFD(s), ACU(s), RSM(s), and
Configuration Module(s). Push in all applicable circuit breakers and apply power. Verify
the EFD displays the initialization page after 5 seconds. The MFD will display database
loading information in a small window at the bottom of the Navigation Map screen.
Configure all systems using Section 10.4 prior to system check out.
NOTE: AHRS Flags may take up to 3 minutes to clear. Airspeed and Altitude flags
may take up to 20 minutes to clear at temperatures below -20C.
NOTE: The MFDs may require up to 3 minutes to completely load all database
features. Menu pages and configuration pages may be accessed during this
time.
10.4 System Configuration
Configure the EFD1000/500 system(s) prior to running the ground test procedure. The
configuration pages are accessed through the EFD display using the MENU button
and the lower Right Control Knob labeled MODE/SYNC.

10.4.1 Main Menu Access
The Main Menu operation is accessed by pushing the MENU button. See PFD Pilot
Guide and MFD Pilot Guide for Main Menu operation.

10.4.2 Menu Navigation
When no fields are enabled for editing, rotating the right control knob clockwise
advances to the next menu page and counterclockwise advances to a previous
menu page.

Editable menu items are displayed in white text on a blue background, non-editable
menus items are green text on a blue background while grey text on a blue
background is disabled from editing.

10.4.3 Edit Mode
Pushing the line select key adjacent to an editable field enables the associated field for
editing. The field turns magenta when enabled and the right control knob reads Edit
Value.

When the field is enabled for editing rotating the right control knob will adjust the
value. Pushing the right control knob or the adjacent line select key will exit from the
editable field.

10.4.4 Main Menu Configuration
The Main Menu consists of pages that are pilot selectable. Refer to the PFD Pilot Guide
and MFD Pilot Guide for Main Menu configuration if necessary.

10.4.5 INSTALLATION MENU UNIT CONFIGURATION
The Installation Menu is entered from the Main Menus SYSTEM STATUS PAGE (page
11 of 11. Simultaneously push and hold the MENU key, Line Select Key #1 and Line
Select Key #2 for 3 seconds while the airspeed is below 30 units.

Figure 10.1 Installation Menu Access

Whenever the warning message in Figure 10.2 is displayed, pressing either control
knob shall advance the Installation menu.

WARNING:
THE INSTALLATION MENU
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS MUST BE SET
IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE APPROVED
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THESE
INSTALLATION SETTINGS MAY
INVALIDATE THE TYPE CERTIFICATED
STATUS OF THIS AIRCRAFT AND/OR
RENDER IT UNAIRWORTHY.

PRESS EITHER CONTROL KNOB TO
ACCEPT
Figure 10.2 Installation Menu Warning
To exit the Installation Menu at any time press the MENU button. All data will be saved as
displayed. The system will reboot and INITIALIZING will appear on the display for
approximately 40 seconds.

Select the appropriate section from the following pages that applies to your system or
systems. The EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD, and the EFD500 MFD have identical page
layouts and configuration options. The EFD500 MFD pages are unique in that some
configuration options are grayed out because they refer to a depopulated ADAHRS function.

Section 10.4.6 EFD1000 PFD and MFD (print twice for dual EFD1000 systems)
Section 10.4.7 EFD500 MFD

Record aircraft information at the beginning of the section and record the configuration in
each table as shown below.

Make a copy of the appropriate section with the information recorded for inclusion into
Appendix D Instructions for Continued Airworthiness.

Use section 10.4.7.1 Configuration Definitions, to assist with configuration Options
selection.

EXAMPLE:

Installation Date:
Aircraft Model: EFD1000 S/N:
Aircraft Type: RSM S/N:
Aircraft S/N: ACU S/N:
CM S/N:

EXAMPLE:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 9 ACU CONFIG
SW v1.0
Feature Options Actual Setting
ACU HSI TYPE 0,1 (0=KI525A, 1=NSD360)
ACU FD TYPE 0,1,3,4 (0=NONE,1=KI256, 3=G550)
ACU DATUM NORMAL,REVERSED
FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
Notes:

Record Aircraft and Equipment Data

Record installation as configured and wired
10.4.6 EFD1000 Installation Menu Configuration
Use this form for both the EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD
INSTALLATION MENU Configuration EFD1000
Installation Date:
CM S/N:
WARNING: Only a Certified Mechanic may set the values on Installation Menu pages 1 and 2.
The values must match the certified speeds in the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM), Pilot
Operating Handbook (POH), or other legal form of documentation (e.g., Placard).

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 1 - IAS CONFIG A
Set Speed Bands per Aircraft Flight Manual.
INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 1 IAS CONFIG A
SW v2.0
Vne 0 to 450
Vno 0 to 450
Vfe 0 to 450
Vs 0 to 450
Vso 0 to 450
Notes:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 2 IAS CONFIG B
Set Speed Markers per Aircraft Flight Manual.
SW v2.0
Vyse 0 to 450
Vmc 0 to 450
Triangle 0 to 450
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 3- IAS CONFIG C
Set IAS UNITS per Aircraft Flight Manual. Configure TAPES based on Flowchart in Figure 10.3.
VPSD EDIT is set based on Operator Configuration Checklist of Appendix C or to
owner/operator preference.
INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 3 IAS CONFIG C
SW v2.0
IAS UNITS kts, mph
TAPES UNLOCKED, LOCK OFF, LOCK ON
VSPD EDIT UNLOCKED, LOCKED
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:
INSTALLATION MENU Configuration EFD1000 (continued)

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 4 NAV SET UP
The following menu will be used to configure the EFD1000 system for the installed GPS, NAV
and autopilot interfaces. The installation wiring diagrams in Section 9 have a Configuration
Matrix table that will be used to set ID#1 and ID#2. The GPS A429 Rx Port speed will be set
to HIGH or LOW. Set NAV#2 Position Source to GPS1 if it is desired to have GPS1 map data
displayed when VLOC#2 is selected. Set to GPS2 if GPS2 map data is to be displayed when
VLOC#2 is selected.

SW v2.0

GPS/NAV #1 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,P,Q,R
GPS/NAV #2 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M
GPS/NAV#1 Speed HIGH, LOW
NAV#2 POSITION SOURCE: GPS1, GPS2
1

Notes: (1) Set to GPS2 for dual integrated GPS units (i.e. dual GNS-430/530s)

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 5 RS232 PORT CONFIG A
The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX IN sensor ports. Options include
GPS TYPE X, WX500, XM Weather, RSM, EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD, and EFD500 MFD inter-
system communication. Note - some ports do not include all interface options. (See wiring
diagrams in sections 9 to determine how each port was wired and configure port
accordingly)
SW v2.0

232 IN PORT 0 NONE, RSM
232 IN PORT 1 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE 3, XM
232 IN PORT 2 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE 3
232 IN PORT 3 NONE, WX500
232 IN PORT 4 NONE, EFD1000 MFD, EFD1000 PFD, EFD500 MFD
Notes: GPS TYPE 1= KLN94/90B, GPS TYPE 2= KLN94 Enhanced, GPS TYPE 3= GX50/55/60/65 and GNS480

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 6 RS232 PORT CONFIG B
The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX IN 5 sensor port and the four RS-
232 TX OUT ports. Options include XM Weather, WX500, ADC (two types) and PFD or MFD
inter-system communications. Note - some ports do not include all interface options. (See
wiring diagrams in sections 9 to determine how each port was wired and configure port
accordingly)


SW v2.0

232 OUT PORT 0 NONE, RSM
232 OUT PORT 1 NONE, XM, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2
232 OUT PORT 2 NONE, EFD, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2
232 OUT PORT 3 NONE, WX500, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2
Notes: ADC TYPE 1=Z format, ADC TYPE 2=C format
Note: EFD is any PFD or MFD

The following menu configures the emulation modes for the Flight Director and HDG and
CRS Datum interfaces. The installation wiring diagrams in Section 9 have a Configuration
Matrix table that will be used to set ACU HSI TYPE and ACU FD TYPE. (See Section 10.4.7.1
for example). Flight Director display pitch and roll offset adjustments are also made.
SW v2.0

ACU HSI TYPE 0,1 (0=KI525A, 1=NSD360)
ACU FD TYPE 0,1,3,4 (0=NONE,1=KI256, 3=G550, 4=52C77)
ACU DATUM NORMAL,REVERSED
FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ -10.0 to +10.0 (degrees)
Notes: These settings do not apply to the EFD500 MFD

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 8 MISC CONFIG A
The following menu will be used to configure the RSM orientation, enable or disable the
emergency GPS sensor located in the RSM, and configure the OAT sensor.
SW 2.0

RSM Orientation TOP, BOTTOM (Inverted orientation)
RSM GPS Enable DISABLE, ENABLE
OAT Enable DISABLE, ENABLE

Notes:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 9 MISC CONFIG B
The following menu will be used to set the aircraft electrical system voltage. EFD Battery
Config will be set to INTERNAL for all -001 displays and REMOTE for all -002 displays. The
pitch attitude zero reference point is aligned for tilted instrument panels and the roll
attitude trim is adjusted to compensate for slightly misaligned EFD mounting in the
instrument panel. (See Section 10.4.5.4 for Panel Tilt Pitch Adj, Panel Roll Adj, and Attitude
Ref Symbol adjustments)

SW 2.0
ELEC SYSTEM 14 VOLT, 28 VOLT
EFD BATTERY CONFG: INTERNAL, REMOTE*
ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ: -5.0 to +5.0 degrees
PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ -10.0 to +20.0 degrees
PANEL ROLL ADJ -2.0 to +2.0 degrees
Notes: * REMOTE is for EFD1000 MFD with EBB58 only

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 10 MISC CONFIG C
The following menu will be used to configure the analog VOR receiver composite phase to
either 0 or 180 degrees. The GPSS Gain can be increased or decreased from the default
setting of 1.0 should this setting not be acceptable. If a traffic receiver is connected then set
the 429 IN PORT 5 to TRAFFIC, otherwise set to NONE.
SW 2.0
COMPOSITE PHASE(VOR1,2) (0,0) (180,0) (0,180) (180,180)
GPSS GAIN: 0.5 to 2.0 (0.1 increments)
429 IN PORT 5 NONE. TRAFFIC
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 11 RSM CALIBRATION
The following menu will be used in the next section to calibrate and validate the
magnetometer in the RSM. Heading errors of up to +/- 6.0 can be calibrated at 30
increments beginning with North. (Follow RSM Cal procedure in Section 10.5)
SW v2.0

Feature Options
START CALIBRATION Press to Initiate
ACCEPT CALIBRATION? Press to ACCEPT Cal
REJECT CALIBRATION? Press to REJECT Cal
HDG SEL 030 to 360 (in 30 increments)
HDG ADJ -6.0 to +6.0 (degrees)
Notes:

This table is used to record the HDG ADJ values used to bring the compass heading values in
to specification.
RSM CALIBRATION
(PFD Software 1.1 and later
PAGE 12 Options
Actual Setting
HDG SEL: 030 KEY 4
HDG ADJ: KEY 5 Editable: -6 to +6

HDG SEL: 060 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 090 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 120 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 150 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 180 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 210 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 240 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 270 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 300 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 330 KEY 4


HDG SEL: 360 KEY 4


INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 12 ACCEL BIAS CAL
Installation Page 12 is for Factory Calibration only and has no installation purpose.

SW v2.0

Feature Options
BIASES (x,y,z) Factory Use Only
START CALIBRATION Factory Use Only
ACCEPT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only
REJECT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only

Notes:


INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 13 WX-500
The following menu is used for WX-500 configuration, system status, and system test.
HEAD TYPE is configuration status. It will display NONE if there is no WX-500 connection,
DISPLAY when a RS232 RX Port is set to WX500, and CONTROL when a RS232 TX Port is set
to WX500.

SW v2.0

HEAD TYPE NONE, DISPLAY, CONTROL
SYSTEM DATA PAGE1,PAGE2,PAGE3,PAGE4
STRIKE TEST Press to Initiate
NOISE MONITOR Press to Initiate
ANTENNA MOUNT TOP,BOTTOM
Notes: The HEAD Type menu entry is status only. It is necessary to exit and re-enter the menu to view the updated information.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 14 NETWORK PAGE
This menu is for diagnostic purposes only.

SW v2.0

Feature Options
IP ADDR 0-255
SUBNET MASK 0-255
GATEWAY 0-255
PORT 0-9999
Not Used
Notes: Repeated presses of top 3 line select keys will select one of 4 selectable fields

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 15 - DIAGNOSTICS
This menu is for diagnostic purposes only. Note Operational Time and Flight Time are
stored in the configuration module of the aircraft and these times are cumulative for the
installation not the EFD unit itself.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 15 DIAGNOSTICS
SW v2.0

Feature Options
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

EXITING / SAVING DATA
To exit the Installation Menu press the MENU button. All data will be saved as it was
displayed on each page. The system will reboot and INITIALIZING will appear on the display
for approximately 40 seconds. Normal operation continues.
10.4.7 EFD500 MFD Installation Menu Configuration
INSTALLATION MENU Configuration EFD500

Installation Date:
CM S/N:

NOTE: Some menus are grayed out as they do not apply to the EFD500 MFD. The EFD500
is depopulated of the ADC and AHRS sensors.

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 1 - IAS CONFIG A

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 1 IAS CONFIG A
SW v2.0 and
subsequent
Vne
Vno
Vfe
Vs
Vso
Notes:


SW v2.0 and
subsequent
Vyse
Vmc
Triangle
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 3- IAS CONFIG C

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 3 IAS CONFIG C
SW v2.0 and
subsequent
IAS UNITS
TAPES
VSPD EDIT
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:
Does Not Apply to EFD500

The following menu will be used to configure the EFD1000 system for the installed GPS, NAV
and autopilot interfaces. The installation wiring diagrams in Section 9 have a Configuration
Matrix table that will be used to set ID#1 and ID#2. (See Section 10.4.7.1 for example). Set
NAV#2 Position Source to GPS1 if it is desired to have GPS1 map data displayed when
VLOC#2 is selected. Set to GPS2 if GPS2 map data is to be displayed when VLOC#2 is
selected.

SW v2.0
GPS/NAV #1 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M,P,Q,R
GPS/NAV #2 NONE,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I,J,K,L,M
NAV#2 POSITION SOURCE GPS1, GPS2
1

Notes: (1) Set to GPS2 for dual integrated GPS units (i.e. dual GNS-430/530s)

The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX IN sensor ports. Options include
GPS, WX500, XM Weather, RSM, and MFD or PFD inter-system communication. Note - some
ports do not include all interface options. (See wiring diagrams in sections 9 to determine
how each port was wired and configure accordingly)
SW v2.0

232 IN PORT 0 NONE, RSM
232 IN PORT 1 NONE, XM
232 IN PORT 2 NONE, GPS TYPE 1, GPS TYPE 2, GPS TYPE 3,
232 IN PORT 3 NONE,WX500
Notes: GPS TYPE 1= KLN94/90B, GPS TYPE 2= KLN94 Enhanced, GPS TYPE 3= GX50/55/60/65 and GNS480

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 6 RS232 CONFIG B
The following menu is used to configure the RS-232 RX5 IN sensor port and the four RS-232
TX OUT ports. Options include XM Weather, WX500, and PFD or MFD inter-system
communications. Note - some ports do not include all interface options. (See wiring
diagrams in sections 9 to determine how each port was wired and configure accordingly)
SW v2.0

232 OUT PORT 0 NONE, RSM
232 OUT PORT 1 NONE, XM
232 OUT PORT 2 NONE, EFD, ADC TYPE 1, ADC TYPE 2
232 OUT PORT 3 NONE, WX500
Notes:


SW v2.0
ACU HSI TYPE
ACU FD TYPE
ACU DATUM
FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ
FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ
Notes:

Note RSM GPS ENABLE must be set to DISABLE or the RSM GPS message will always be
displayed.

SW 2.0
RSM Orientation Does not apply to EFD500
RSM GPS Enable Must be set to disable.
RSM GPS Usage Does not apply to EFD500
OAT Enable Does not apply to EFD500
OAT Display Does not apply to EFD500
Notes:


SW 2.0 and
SW v1.1
ELEC SYSTEM 14 VOLT, 28 VOLT
EFD BATTERY CONFG: INTERNAL, REMOTE*
Panel Tilt Pitch Adjustment Does not apply to EFD500
Panel Roll Adjustment Does not apply to EFD500
Not Used
Notes:

The following menu configures the analog VOR receiver composite phase. If a traffic receiver
is connected then set the 429 IN PORT 5 to TRAFFIC, otherwise set to NONE.

SW 2.0 and
SW v1.1
Composite Phase Does not apply to EFD500
GPSS Gain Grayed Out Does Not Apply to EFD500*
429 IN PORT 5 NONE, TRAFFIC
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:


SW v2.0

Feature Options
START CALIBRATION
ACCEPT CALIBRATION?
REJECT CALIBRATION?
HDG SEL
HDG ADJ
Notes:


SW v2.0

Feature Options
BIASES (x,y,z) Factory Use Only
START CALIBRATION Factory Use Only
ACCEPT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only
REJECT CALIBRATION? Factory Use Only

Notes:

INSTALLATION MENU PAGE 13 WX500
The following menu is used for WX-500 configuration, system status, and system test.
HEAD TYPE is configuration status. It will display NONE if there is no WX-500 connection,
DISPLAY when a RS232 RX Port is set to WX500, and CONTROL when a RS232 TX Port is set
to WX500.

SW v2.0

HEAD TYPE NONE, DISPLAY, CONTROL
SYSTEM DATA PAGE1,PAGE2,PAGE3,PAGE4
STRIKE TEST Press to Initiate
NOISE MONITOR Press to Initiate
ANTENNA MOUNT TOP,BOTTOM
Notes: The HEAD Type menu entry is status only. It is necessary to exit and re-enter the menu to view the updated information.


SW v2.0

Feature Options
IP ADDR 0-255
SUBNET MASK 0-255
GATEWAY 0-255
PORT 0-9999
Not Used
Notes: Repeated presses of top 3 line select keys will select one of 4 selectable fields


SW v2.0

Feature Options
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Notes:

displayed on each page. The system will reboot and INITIALIZING will appear on the
display for approximately 40 seconds. Normal operation continues.

10.4.7.1 CONFIGURATION DEFINITIONS
This section contains an expanded definition of each menu feature and detailed
instructions for the available configuration options. Note not all PFD and MFD versions
have every option as defined below.
IAS Configurations
V
ne
: Never Exceed speed (beginning of red band)

V
no
: Maximum Structural Cruise speed (beginning of yellow band). For aircraft with no
published yellow speed band set V
no
= V
ne
.

V
fe
: Maximum Flap Extend speed (top of white band) - set to V
fe
= V
s
on
aircraft with no flaps

V
s
: No Flap Stall speed (bottom of green band)

V
so
: Full Flap Stall speed (bottom of white band) - set to V
so
= V
s
on aircraft
with no flaps

V
yse
: Single Engine best rate of climb (blue marker) on multi engine aircraft set to
zero 0 on single engine aircraft.

V
mc
: Single Engine minimum control speed (red marker) on multi engine aircraft set to
zero 0 on single engine aircraft.

Initial Flap Extension Speed set to zero 0 on aircraft without a published initial
flap extension speed. For aircraft that have a published speed at which the first
notch of flap may be deployed, set to that published value.

IAS UNITS: Set to Knots or MPH as defined in the AFM

TAPES: UNLOCKED = Must only be set when Airspeed and Altimeter are still in
basic T configuration. With this setting the pilot can turn airspeed and
altitude tapes on or off via TPS Hot Key.
LOCK OFF = Must be used when aircraft has VMO Barber Pole airspeed
indicator. Tapes are turned off and cannot be turned on by pilot
LOCK ON = This setting required whenever Altimeter or Airspeed Indicator
has been relocated from basic T configuration. Tapes are always enabled
and cannot be turned off by pilot.

Use the following flowchart to determine the proper configuration for the TAPES setting of
Installation Menu 3.

Figure 10.3 TAPES Configuration Flow Chart

VSPD EDIT: UNLOCKED = pilot can modify value of VSPEED textual markers in Main
Menu.
LOCKED = the pilot cannot modify the values of the VSPEED textual
markers in the Main Menu.

Miscellaneous Configuration A, B, C

RSM Orientation: Set to TOP if top or mounted. Set to INVERTED if bottom mounted.

RSM GPS Enable: Set to ENABLE if top mounted or internally mounted within a
composite or fabric structure that allows for GPS signal transmission. Set to DISABLE if
bottom mounted or internally mounted within an aluminum structure.

OAT Enable: Set to ENABLE if the RSM is top mounted or bottom mounted and not in
the exhaust stream. Set to DISABLE if the RSM is in the exhaust stream or internally
mounted as the OAT reading will be inaccurate. Note - setting OAT Enable to DISABLE
will also disable the TAS and Wind display.
ELEC SYSTEM: Set to 14V or 28V as per aircraft electrical system.

PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ: This setting is used to compensate for aircraft instrument
panels that are inclined with respect to the aircraft leveling indices. The EFD1000 AHRS
performance and the RSM calibration depend on the AHRS sensor orientation to the
aircraft waterline using the aircraft leveling indices.

CAUTION: Do not use the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ adjustment to align the Aircraft
Reference Symbol to a zero pitch mark for level flight. Though such an
adjustment appears to be a natural step, incorrect adjustment may result
in incorrect pitch, roll and heading values. For non-tilted panel
installations, the EFD1000 AHRS must show zero degrees pitch when the
aircraft is leveled using the aircraft leveling indices. Adjustment of the
PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ to set the Aircraft Reference Symbol to a zero pitch
mark for level-flight may result in improper PFD alignment. If the level
flight level zero pitch reference needs adjustment, proceed in accordance
with the ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ procedure described below.

NOTE: Once the PFD is installed and properly aligned, the Aircraft Reference
Symbols level-flight pitch attitude indication changes with speed and
aircraft loading and cannot be adjusted by the pilot. See 14CFR
23.1303(f). See ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ adjustment to determine if
further action is required.


Adjust the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ value using one of the two methods shown below.

Method 1 Using an Inclinometer
Using an inclinometer and the aircraft leveling indices, measure the offset angle in
degrees (0.5), from aircraft level. This reading should be taken when a technician is
seated in the cockpit since the angle could shift when the technician boards the
aircraft. This measurement will be entered in the EFD1000 as CORRECTED PITCH
ATTITUDE. Nose high is + degrees.

CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE: 2.0
CORRECTED ROLL ATTITUDE: 0.3

Figure 10.4 Illustration of aircraft 2 nose high

1) Set the ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ to 0.0.
2) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key and use the bottom right knob to
enter a value for PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ that results in the CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE
(Figure 10.4) equaling the value read on the inclinometer. It may also be set to the
amount of panel tilt as determined through measurement.
3) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key.

Method 2 Leveling the Aircraft
Level the airplane in pitch in accordance with the aircraft manufacturers procedure.
Then change the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ adjustment to make the CORRECTED PITCH
ATTITUDE equal to 0.0.
1) Level the aircraft in pitch using the aircraft manufacturers procedure.

CORRECTED PITCH ATTITUDE: 0.0
CORRECTED ROLL ATTITUDE: 0.0

2) Set the ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ to 0.0.
Figure 10.5 Illustration of Zero degree pitch adjustment
3) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key and use the bottom right knob to
enter a value for PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ that will result in the CORRECTED PITCH
ATTITUDE (F ) equaling 0.0. igure 10.5
4) Press the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ line select key.

PANEL ROLL ADJ: Panel Roll Adjust is used to align the roll reference mark of the
EFD1000 to zero degrees when the aircraft is wings level. With the aircraft wings level
change the Panel Roll Adjust adjustment to make the CORRECTED ROLL ATTITUDE
equal to 0.0. Should more than 2 of correction be required the mechanical mounting
of the EFD1000 for level in the panel should be re-verified.

CAUTION A RSM Calibration must be performed before first flight after changing
either the PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ or PANEL ROLL ADJ values.

ATTITUDE REF SYMBOL ADJ: This is used to make small changes to the pitch attitude
reference mark on the EFD1000 should the aircraft fly consistently slightly nose high or
nose low in cruise trim. It is not necessary to perform the RSM Calibration after
making changes to this setting.

NAV Setup Configuration

GPS/NAV#1 (ID#1): Ranges from A to R as specified on the wiring diagrams of Section
9. See example below

GPS/NAV#2 (ID#2): Ranges from A to M as specified on the wiring diagrams of Section
9. See example below.

Using the Configuration Table from Figure 9.11 as an example;

If you wired the drawing exactly as shown you would select ID#1 = H and ID#2 = D.
This would mean you have a RS-232/Analog GPS1 (i.e., KLN-94, GX-55) with an
Analog NAV1 (i.e., KX-155A) and an Analog NAV2 (i.e., KX-155A).

If you have the above installation without a NAV2 then select ID#1 = H and ID#2 =
NONE.

If you have the above installation with no NAV1 or NAV2 (just GPS and autopilot) then
select ID#1 = G and ID#2 = NONE.


COMPOSITE PHASE (VOR1, VOR2): Most modern navigation receivers will be set to (0, 0)
as VOR1 and VOR2 will have VOR composite outputs with zero degree phase shift. For
receivers with VOR composite outputs that are 180 out of phase (i.e., ARC RT-385) set
to 180 as required.

ACU Configuration

ACU HSI TYPE: 0= KI-525A, Emulates the KI-525A HSI
1= NSD-360A, Emulates the NSD-360A HSI
2= reserved
3= reserved

Below is an example from Figure 9.16 showing a KI-525A Emulation with a Bendix
King autopilot. In this case you would set the ACU HSI TYPE =0:

ACU HSI TYPE = 0
(see Section 10)

ACU FD TYPE: 0= None, no flight director installed
1= KI-254/KI-256, Emulates the KI-254/256 Flight Director
2= Reserved
3= G-550A, Emulates the G-550A Flight Director
4= 52C77, Emulates the 52C77 Flight Director

Below is an example from Figure 9.20 showing a KI-256 Emulation. In this case you
would set the ACU FD TYPE =1:

ACU DATUM: 0 = Normal
1 = Reversed. It may be necessary to select Reversed if the HDG or
CRS Datum drives the autopilot in the opposing direction. Some HSI
units use reversed logic for CRS and HDG Datum. Verify through
ground test the proper setting.

FD ROLL OFFSET ADJ: Flight Director Roll Offset is used to align the PFD Command
Bars to the Command Bars on the mechanical FD instrument in the roll axis. Positive
number increases roll in RIGHT (clockwise) direction. Negative number increases roll in
LEFT (counterclockwise) direction.

FD PITCH OFFSET ADJ: Flight Director Pitch Offset is used to align the PFD Command
Bars to the Command Bars on the mechanical FD instrument in the pitch axis. Positive
number increases pitch in UP direction. Negative number increases pitch in DOWN
direction.

The value of the command bars position is digitally shown in the top portion of the
Installation Menu when the autopilots flight director is valid and engaged. This will
assist you in aligning the PFD flight director to the mechanical flight director indicator.

displayed on each page. The system will reboot and INITIALIZING will appear on the
display for approximately 40 seconds. Normal operation continues.
10.5 RSM Calibration
10.5.1 Calibration Overview
The Remote Sensor Module must be calibrated by performing a compass swing in the
aircraft for any new installations and any follow up maintenance activities that could
affect RSM accuracy.

Such activities might include but are not limited to the replacement of the RSM,
replacement of the Configuration Module, installation of a mechanical or electrical
device in the vicinity to the RSM, installation of an appliance that might generate a
magnetic interference.

NOTE: Before replacing the RSM and/or the Configuration Module, determine if the
current installation has had SB2009-02 applied by referring to the EFD1000
Configuration Chart or the aircraft logs. If so, do not replace the Configuration
Module or RSM without completing the calibrations as identified in the SB2009-
02. Contact an Aspen Avionics FSE for more information.

An overview of the RSM Calibration procedure is as follows (see Figure 10.8):

CAUTION: When a Calibration is initiated, the aircraft must be turned as described
below. If the calibration is initiated and then accepted without moving the aircraft, an
erroneous calibration will be written to the Configuration Module, potentially resulting
in failure to initialize.

A heading will be checked to verify the reasonableness of PFD heading prior to
calibration.
The aircraft will be taxied to a magnetically quiet and level area at least 200ft
from metal buildings and clear of metal grates, manhole covers and rebar
within the concrete. A Compass Rose is ideal for this procedure.
The aircraft can start from any heading.
With engines running, all electrical equipment operating, and the aircraft
stationary the RSM CAL page will be entered and Start Calibration will be
initiated (see Figure 10.7).
After a 15 second countdown timer the pilot/operator will begin to taxi the
aircraft in a circle (cw or ccw) with the radius of approximately twice the length
of the aircrafts wing as viewed from the cockpit ( 30ft).
The aircraft will be taxied under its own power at a constant rate around a
circle until a 60 second timer elapses. The aircraft must not stop until the timer
has exhausted.
At the completion of the 60 seconds the aircraft will have made at least a 450
circle (360 + 90) to approximately two complete circles (720).
At the end of the 60 second timer four headings about 90 apart will be
checked against a calibrated heading source (i.e., site compass, compass rose).
If PFD heading is acceptable then the calibration is Accepted.
If the PFD heading is not within tolerance then it is Rejected and the calibration
procedure is re-run.
After the calibration is accepted headings are checked using a calibrated
reference (i.e., a sight compass) every 30 (starting from North) to verify that
the heading accuracy is within 4.
EFD1000 PFD software version 1.1 and subsequent will allow the heading to be
calibrated every 30.

10.5.1.1 Conventional Gear RSM Calibration Procedure
Perform the RSM calibration procedure per Section 10.5.2 with the tail wheel on the
ground. Verify heading accuracy is within +/- 4. If the heading accuracy cannot be
brought within +/- 4 tolerance then try temporarily shimming the rear of the RSM up.
Perform another RSM calibration. If a shim corrects the heading accuracy then install
permanent shim per Section 6.9.9.

In some installations it might not be possible to achieve +/- 4 accuracy during the
RSM calibration with the aircraft tail wheel on the ground. If feasible and necessary, the
RSM calibration can be performed in the aircraft flight attitude (with the aircraft tail
wheel lifted off the ground). Contact Aspen Avionics product support for tail dragger
RSM calibration assistance.

Figure 10.6 RSM Calibration Graphic
10.5.2 RSM Calibration Procedure
The RSM calibration routine is accomplished using the Installation Menu RSM
CALIBRATION menu page. See Section 10.4.5 (Installation Menu Access) for
instructions on entering the INSTALLATION MENU.

CAUTION: The PANEL TILT PITCH ADJ and ROLL ATT TRIM must be set correctly on
the Installation Menu page prior to calibrating the RSM.

Figure 10.7 RSM Calibration Page

On the RSM CALIBRATION menu page the current calibrated heading (to the
nearest 0.1 degrees) will be continuously displayed adjacent to the CAL HDG:
menu field.

NOTE: Verify CAL HDG is within 25 degrees of a calibrated compass source prior
to starting the RSM Calibration. This is a rough check of the hard and soft
iron effects (magnetic interference) in the vicinity of the RSM. Should the
CAL HDG be greater than 25 degrees then the RSM location should be re-
surveyed per Section 6.9.1.
With aircraft stationary at (POSITION 1) of Figure 10.8 press the START CALIBRATION
line select key. The annunciation shown in Figure 10.10 will be displayed with a
countdown timer that begins with 15 secs and counts down to 0 secs.

CAUTION: Do not press ACCEPT Calibration without moving the aircraft in the
procedure below as corruption to the configuration module could occur.

When the menu of is displayed immediately begin taxiing the aircraft
clockwise or counter-clockwise at a constant rate of no faster than 1 turn every 30
seconds. About half normal taxi speed or a brisk walking speed is about right.
Approximately 10 seconds after initial movement (see POSITION A) the aircraft should
be taxiing at a constant rate (CR) throughout the rest of the procedure. When the
countdown timer is reached between one and a quarter turns (450) (POSITION B) and
two turns (720) (POSITION D) should have been completed. While turning the aircraft
do not stop the aircraft until the end of the 60 second timer and appears.
Figure 10.9
Figure 10.10

If you find that the timing of the turns was not right such that Magnetometer
Calibration Complete message occurs between B & D of Figure 10.6, then REJECT the
results and re-run the procedure.

MAGNETOMETER CALIBRATION
IN PROGRESS

TURN THE AIRCRAFT
NO FASTER THAN
1 CIRCLE IN 30 SECS
UNTIL TIMER STOPS

TIME REMAINING: ## SECS
IN PROGRESS
Figure 10.8 - Calibration in Process

DO NOT MOVE THE AIRCRAFT FOR
THE NEXT 7 SECS

Figure 10.9 Aircraft Turning

At the end of the calibration routine the ACCEPT CALIBRATION? and REJECT
CALIBRATION? menu options will be enabled.
NOTE: If the message Erroneous Calibration Values is displayed then magnetic
interference exists in the vicinity of the calibration area or the RSM is mounted in a
magnetically noisy area. Try the calibration process again in a flat magnetically
quiet area. If the message is displayed again the RSM location must be surveyed
for magnetic interference.

To determine whether to ACCEPT or REJECT the results check four headings
approximately 90 apart against a known good heading source (i.e., aircraft compass,
sight compass, compass rose).

If the headings are within 10 then press ACCEPT and use the Heading Offset
Adjustment in Section 10.5.3 to align each heading value to actual.

Pressing the ACCEPT CALIBRATION selection shall accept the calibration results,
display the annunciation shown in Figure 10.13 for 5 seconds, and return the RSM
CALIBRATION menu page to its initial state.


ACCEPTED

COMPLETE
Figure 10.10 - Accept/Reject Results

PLEASE ACCEPT OR REJECT RESULTS
Figure 10.11 Results Accepted
Pressing the REJECT CALIBRATION selection shall reject the calibration results. Reject
the results if the calibration was poor or a previously stored calibration has better
heading accuracies.



REJECTED
Figure 10.12 Results Rejected
10.5.3 Heading Offset Adjustment
10.5.3.1 Heading Offset Adjustment
When the calibration routine is complete and the results have been accepted the CAL HDG
value will be displayed.


CAL HDG: 032.7
Figure 10.13 Calibration Heading before adjustment
Position the aircraft so that it is at a heading of 30 as verified by a sight compass or
other calibrated means. Press the line select key next to HDG SEL and then turn the right
knob until HDG SEL: 030 is displayed. Now press the line select key next to HDG ADJ
and turn the right knob until the CAL HDG of figure 10.15 displays exactly 030.0 as
shown in figure 10.16 or as close to 030 as possible within a 4 tolerance. The HDG
ADJ field will display the amount of correction (+/- 6.0 degrees) that was required. Press
the HDG ADJ line select key to accept the setting.


CAL HDG: 030.0

Figure 10.14 Calibrated Heading after adjustment

Now repeat the process above for all other headings in 30 increments from 60 to 360.
Press the MENU key to exit the Installation Menu. Continue with heading accuracy tests in
Section 10.5.4.


NOTE: In some aircraft, prop wash and wind during ground operations can create inconsistent
pressures in the pitot-static system. The pressures can affect the ADAHRS, resulting in small pitch
and heading perturbations. Before reading the aircraft headings for the purposes of calibration,
ensure the attitude solution has stabilized and is not influenced by external winds and pressures. The
disturbances normally settle out over a period of 15 to 60 seconds. Idle power or temporarily
selecting the alternate static source can sometimes eliminate the effect.
10.5.4 Heading Accuracy Test
As a final check, position the aircraft on the headings shown on Installation Final Check
Sheet of Appendix B and verify heading (viewed on HSI display) is within +/- 4 degrees
using a calibrated heading source (i.e., sight compass, compass rose). Record the actual
PFD headings in the table for inclusion in the aircraft maintenance records.
If any heading is outside 4 then rerun the Calibration Procedure and or Heading Offset
adjustment.

10.5.5 Heading Interference Test
With aircraft engine(s) running monitor current aircraft heading on PFD and exercise flight
controls stop to stop including flaps and any electric trim tabs. Verify the heading (viewed
on HSI display) does not change on the PFD by more than 2. If movement of flight
controls causes more than a 2 heading change then it may be necessary to degauss the
flight controls including the cables. A handheld degausser can be found at most audio
and video stores.
Operate all electrical and environmental equipment including:
Blowers, fans, heaters, air conditioner
Deice boots, fuel pump(s), backup vacuum pumps
Landing, logo, NAV lighting
Operate pulse equipment transponder, WX radar, DME
Key all VHF communication radios.
Operate autopilot so that all servos run (roll, pitch, yaw, trim)
If the operation of any electrical system causes the heading to change by more than 2 the
RSM wiring may need to be relocated away from the offending system. The offending
system may also have a bonding issue to the airframe that needs to be corrected.
Run engine(s) from idle to take off power and verify that the heading does not change by
more than 2. Prop wash at higher RPMs may cause a heading shift, try an alternate static
source if this is a issue.
This completes all RSM calibration and heading tests.
10.6 Ground Test Procedure (PFD, EFD500 MFD and EFD1000 in PFD Reversion and in
MFD Mode)
The ground test procedure will consist of checking for proper operation of the following
items. Check the PFD and the EFD1000 MFD in reverted mode simultaneously. Check the
EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD using the sections marked for these devices:
a) Airspeed Tape, Altitude Tape, and OAT Sensor
b) AHRS Sensor
c) GPS Sensor Inputs (including Backup RSM GPS Sensor)
d) Navigation Sensor Inputs (if installed)
e) Backup Navigation Indicator
f) Autopilot Sensor Outputs (if installed)
g) Flight Director (if installed)
h) Sonalert (if installed)
i) Decision Height (if installed)
j) Traffic Display (if installed)
k) XM Weather Display and Control (if installed)
l) WX500 Display and Control (if installed)
m) Reversion Mode (EFD1000 MFD only)
n) Ancillary Equipment Heading Check (if using ARINC 429 heading from EFD1000)
o) Ancillary Equipment Air Data Check (if connected)
p) Inter-Display Communication Test
q) EMI Test
r) Flight Control Interference Check

CAUTION: Do not exceed the aircrafts maximum Airspeed, Altitude, or Vertical Speed at
anytime during the testing. Damage could result to the pre-existing aircraft
instruments.

NOTE: When changing indicated airspeed or altitude on the ground using pitot/static test
equipment, changes in the AHRS display of pitch, roll and heading will result,
possibly accompanied by a CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE annunciation. This behavior is
the result of the Kalman Filter algorithms employed in the EFD1000 attitude solution.
These changes in pitch, roll or heading are normal and do NOT indicate a system
failure. The integrated nature of the EFD1000 AHRS algorithms is such that AHRS
performance can only be properly evaluated during flight or ground maneuvers.

10.6.1 Indicated Airspeed Display
WARNING: This test must be performed by a certified mechanic.

a) Using Installation Final Check Sheet of Appendix B record the aircraft speed
settings from the Aircraft Flight Manual in the IAS Setting column. Set the
Pitot/Static test set for 5000 ft above field elevation. Increase airspeed to V
ne
and
check all Speed Bands and Speed Markers listed in table.
10.6.2 Altitude Display
a) With the Pitot/Static tester still set for 5000 ft above field elevation and with BARO
Set to 29.92 in. Hg. on the PFD (see Section 12), verify altitude tape displays
altitude within 40ft of the calibrated test set altitude.
10.6.3 System Leak Test
a) Perform a pitot-static system leak test per the aircraft manufacturers
maintenance manual or set the Pitot Static Test Set to 1000ft above field elevation
and without additional pumping for a period of 1 minute the aircraft static system
should not lose more than 100ft of altitude in a non-pressurized aircraft.
10.6.4 Outside Air Temperature (if ENABLED)
a) Verify the OAT displays on the Data Bar and is not dashed.
10.6.5 AHRS Sensor Test
a) Verify that correct aircraft attitude information is presented on the Attitude
Indicator portion of the PFD. The Flags may take up to 5 minutes to clear when
the ambient temperature is below -20 C. Typically the attitude solution will be
available in less than 3 minutes.
10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test
Refer to GPS manufacturers instructions for operating GPS receiver and verifying a
complete and fully functional interface.

All GPS interfaces
a) Allow the GPS receiver to acquire a valid position and enter a Direct To waypoint or
a Flight Plan. Verify the flight plan data appears on the PFD (if wired) and that it is
correctly oriented on the magnetic compass card.

NOTE: If the basemap does not correctly orient on the compass card, ensure that
the GPS is configured for magnetic north reference.

b) Ensure GPS2 (if installed) is OFF.

c) Select GPS1 on the PFD and verify the CRS pointer auto-slews (if enabled) to the
desired track (DTK). To enable AUTOCRS go to Main Menu page 1.

d) Select OBS or Hold Mode (if available) on the GPS and verify that the CRS knob on
the PFD has control over the CRS pointer (manual-slew).

e) Verify the To/From and Left/Right deflection has the correct polarity.

f) Check GPS vertical deviation for proper polarity (if connected).

NOTE: The EFD1000 system will not display a VDI (GPS LPV Glide Slope) indicator
without an activated valid LPV approach with APPROACH mode active.

g) Verify that the OBS resolver output (if available) reads correctly on the GPS.

h) Turn off the GPS receiver and verify GPS1 is red slashed and goes invalid on PFD.

i) Verify that RSM GPS Reversion is correctly annunciated.

j) Repeat procedure for GPS2 if installed.

Analog GPS interfaces
a) Verify OBS accuracy on GPS and calibrate if necessary using GPS manufacturers
instructions.

RSM GPS (if ENABLED)
a) With RSM GPS enabled verify RSM GPS in yellow box does not appear on left side of
HSI display. Absence of RSM annunciation verifies correct operation of RSM GPS.
See Installation Menu 4 for instructions on enabling the RSM GPS module.

10.6.7 NAV Receiver Sensor Test
a) Select NAV1 on the PFD and create a valid and invalid condition with a Nav Signal
Generator verifying that the NAV Flag is displayed (Red Slash) when invalid.

b) Tune an ILS frequency on the Nav Receiver and verify the LDI (Localizer) scale is
displayed on the ADI portion of the PFD.

c) Tune the Nav Signal Generator to the ILS test frequency and generate a valid Glide
Slope signal. Verify the VDI (Glide Slope) scale appears on the right side of the ADI.
d) Generate a signal above and below the Glide Slope beam and verify proper polarity
of the GS deviation for Fly Up and Fly Down on the PFD.

NOTE: The EFD1000 system will not display a VDI (Glide Slope) indicator without
both valid localizer and Glide Slope signals.
e) Repeat procedure for NAV2 if installed.
10.6.8 Backup Navigation Indicator
a) Verify the backup navigation indicator continues to function after pulling the PFD
and ACU circuit breakers.
10.6.9 Autopilot Sensor Test
Refer to autopilot manufacturers post installation check out procedures for complete
autopilot post installation ground checks. At a minimum complete the following
checks to verify the EFD1000 interface is satisfactory.

NOTE: For attitude based autopilots it might be necessary to level the
autopilot gyro to get proper FD and autopilot response from the test.

CAUTION: Verify control surfaces are free and clear.

a) If installed, center the HDG Bug under the lubber line and engage the autopilot
and select HDG Mode.

b) The FD (if installed) should be level and the yoke should not turn.

c) Move the HDG Bug left of the lubber line and the FD and or yoke should bank
left.

d) Move the HDG Bug to right of lubber line and the FD and or yoke should bank
right.

e) With NAV1 selected on the PFD and a valid Nav Signal generated engage the
autopilot in NAV Mode and verify that the FD and/or yoke follow the CRS
Pointer in phasing.

f) Verify that the autopilot responds to correct Left/Right phasing by generating
left and right needle deflection. For autopilots that monitor the NAV FLAG,
generate an invalid Nav Signal and verify autopilot responds accordingly.

g) Engage APPR Mode and verify that the autopilot responds correctly to a
generated Fly Up and Fly Down command. For autopilots that monitor the GS
FLAG, generate an invalid GS Signal and verify autopilot responds accordingly.

10.6.10 Flight Director Test
a) If installed, engage the Flight Director (FD) in HDG Mode and verify that the
command bars are in view.

NOTE: Some rate based autopilots may require a valid vertical and lateral mode be
engaged to view the flight director.

b) Adjust the HDG Bug to the right of the lubber line. Verify the command bars
indicate bank right. Adjust the HDG Bug to the left of the lubber line and verify
the command bars indicate bank left.

c) Compare the FD bars to the mechanical FD instrument, if installed. Note the
degrees of difference between displays, if any, and adjust FD Roll Offset Adj
as necessary on Installation Menu page 9 to closely match both displays. For
example, if PFD FD bars need 2 more degrees of right bank then set FD Roll
Offset Adj = +2.

d) Generate a pitch up command with the flight director and verify FD bars
indicate pitch up. Generate a pitch down command with the flight director and
verify FD bars indicate pitch down.

e) Compare the FD bars to the mechanical FD instrument, if installed. Note
degrees of difference between displays, if any, and adjust FD Pitch Offset Adj
as necessary on Installation Menu page 9 to closely match both displays. For
example, if PFD FD bars need 3 more degrees of pitch up then set FD Pitch
Offset Adj = +3
10.6.11 Sonalert Test
a) If installed, verify the Sonalert is operational by generating a Selected Altitude
alert on the PFD. This can be done by setting the Selected Altitude to 300ft
above current altitude.

b) Then adjust the BARO setting (increasing altitude on the tape) until the solid
yellow altitude flag is seen on the PFD (just left of Selected Altitude window).

c) The Sonalert should sound before reaching the selected altitude.

10.6.12 Decision Height (DH) Test
a) If installed, set Decision Height on Radar Altimeter indicator to less than
50ft.

b) Press the Test button on the Radar Altimeter Indicator and verify that the DH
annunciation displays on the PFD.

c) For KRA-10A installations it may be necessary to turn the DH off and then push
and hold the DH Test knob while turning it clockwise until the DH light comes
on.

10.6.13 Traffic Display Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD, and EFD1000 MFD)
a) Turn on traffic processor and initiate TAS self test through traffic control unit.
Verify traffic test pattern appears correctly on the EFD. The traffic interface may
also be verified by observing aircraft in the vicinity on the EFD display.

10.6.14 XM Weather Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD,
and EFD1000 MFD)
a) Turn on XM weather receiver and allow it to acquire satellite data. A clear view
of the southern sky will be required.
b) Select the XM STATUS page on the EFD and verify the XM Serial Number and the
Signal Quality is reported.
c) Select various weather options from EFD to verify control bus functionality.
10.6.15 WX-500 Display and Control Test (if installed, applies to PFD, EFD500 MFD, and
EFD1000 MFD)
a) Turn on WX500 receiver.

b) Select WX500 display on EFD and initiate a strike test through EFD (if
configured for Control) or initiate the strike test through the WX-500 control
unit if configured for Display.

c) Verify strike test data appears on the EFD display.

10.6.16 Ancillary Equipment Heading Check
a) Verify proper operation of any ancillary components that are using the ARINC
429 heading output from the EFD1000 system.

b) Use ancillary equipment manufacturers installation test procedures to perform
ground check on their equipment.

10.6.17 Ancillary Equipment Air Data Check
a) Verify proper operation of any ancillary components that are using the ARINC
429 or RS-232 air data output from the EFD1000 system.

Use ancillary equipment manufacturers installation test procedures to perform ground
checks on their equipment.

10.6.18 EFD Inter-System Communication Test
For all multi display interfaces the RS232 inter-system communications should be
checked as follows:

a) Begin with all displays powered on.

b) Pull the circuit breaker to the PFD display and verify that the MFD display(s)
annunciate Cross Link Failure. Reset PFD breaker.
c) In a Three display installation pull each MFD circuit breaker individually and
verify the other MFD displays Cross Link Failure.
d) In EFD1000 MFD installations press the REV button on the MFD and adjust the
Baro setting on the EFD1000 MFD and verify the Baro changes on the PFD to
match.

10.6.19 EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery Test (if installed) and internal battery tests
a) On each EFD, press MENU key and rotate right knob until Main Menu page 10 of
11 is displayed.
b) Press line select key next to Battery.
c) After timer has elapsed verify the battery capacity is a minimum of 80%. If the
capacity is below 80% then charge the EBB or internal battery to 80% or above
by leaving the EFD powered on from external power. Follow step d) to return
the EFD to external power for charging.
d) Press line select key next to EXT PWR to return system to external power.

10.6.20 TAPES Configuration Check
Verify the tapes are LOCKED or UNLOCKED as required by the flowchart in Figure
10.3.

a) If TAPES are locked on (LOCK ON) - IAS and Altitude tapes should be visible
and pressing the TPS line select key should have no effect.
b) If TAPES are locked off (LOCK OFF) IAS and Altitude tapes should not be
displayed on PFD and TPS line select key has no effect.

c) If TAPES are UNLOCKED then pressing TPS line select key will de-clutter IAS
and Altitude tapes from PFD.

10.6.21 EMI Test (test with all EFD units operating)
Monitor the EFD for Flags, Red-Xs, Red Slashes, heading changes, altitude changes,
airspeed changes, attitude changes or any error messages while performing the
following Test:

a) Transmit on all Comm radios for 20 seconds each at 118.000MHz, 126.900MHz,
and 136.950MHz.
b) Turn on all transponders, DMEs, Wx Radar, and all other pulse type equipment for
20 seconds each.

c) Operate all aircraft lighting including position lights, strobe lights, navigation
lights, and all other forms of lighting for 20 seconds each.

d) Operate all environmental equipment including fans, air conditioning, heaters, and
all other forms of environmental control equipment for 20 seconds each.
e) Operate Fuel pump(s), deice boots, windshield heat, prop heat, etc.

f) Operate engine(s) and verify no interference.

10.6.22 Flight Control Interference Check
CAUTION: Verify control surfaces are free and clear.

a) With all EFD mounted in the instrument panel push the control column (yoke or
stick) all the way forward (nose down) and verify there is sufficient clearance
between all EFD, and their knobs, and the control column. With the control
column fully forward move it from lock to lock (full right to full left) and verify
there is sufficient clearance between all EFD, and their knobs, and the control
column.

10.7 WX-500 Installation and Maintenance
When an EFD is configured as CONTROL the following functions are accessed through
the WX-500 page of the installation menus. They are intended to assist maintenance
personnel in performing installation or repair of the WX-500. Consult manufacturers
data for troubleshooting and repair of the WX-500 sensor and peripheral equipment.

When the WX-500 Mode is Control, the WX-500 Installation Menu shall display and
enable the SYSTEM DATA, STRIKE TEST, NOISE MONITOR, and ANTENNA MOUNT menu
keys.

When the WX-500 Mode is Display or None, the WX-500 Installation Menu shall disable
(gray) the SYSTEM DATA, STRIKE TEST, NOISE MONITOR, and ANTENNA MOUNT menu
keys. Note - Use other installed WX-500 control panel to access these functions.

10.7.1 System Data
When the System Data display is selected (line select key depressed), information
regarding the WX-500 is requested by the EFD and displayed in the upper portion of
the screen. There are four pages of data which are selected by rotating the right knob.
Software Versions Page 1
Configuration Inputs and Heading Page 2
Environmental Data Page 3
Fault Log Page 4

Figure 10.15 WX-500 System Data Page 1





10.7.2 Strike Test
When the Strike Test display is selected, the EFD sends a Strike Test mode control
message to the WX-500 and displays the test strikes in the upper portion of the
screen.
The outer ring of the Strike Test display shall represent 25 nm. The sides of the Strike
Test mode acceptance box shall be drawn at 183 nm and 4510 degrees. Test
strikes shall be displayed for one second and appear as a cross at the reported range
and bearing as shown above

Figure 10.19 WX-500 Strike Test Page
10.7.3 Noise Monitor
When the Noise Monitor display is selected, the EFD sends a Noise Monitor mode
control message to the WX-500 and displays the noise strikes in the upper portion of
the screen as shown.

Figure 10.20 WX-500 Noise Monitor Page
The noise monitor mode shall display triggers, out to 400 nm, until the noise monitor
mode is exited. The noise monitor mode shall display the number of triggers received
since entering this mode. Pressing and holding the noise monitor line select key shall
activate the clear strike function.
10.7.4 A
a
e detected by in the WX-500,
the Antenna Jumper Error condition is cleared. Otherwise the Antenna Jumper Error
condition is set and no weather data will be transmitted.

ntenna Mount
When the Antenna Mount menu item is selected, the installer can edit the Antenn
Mount setting to be Top or Bottom. When the Antenna Mount menu item is deselected,
the EFD1000 EFD sends an Antenna Mount message to the WX-500. If the value
transmitted by the EFD1000 EFD matches the jumper valu

11 Post Installation Flight Check
CAUTION: Only perform flight test in day VFR conditions with an appropriately rated
pilot for the aircraft type to be flown.
For MFD1000 installations press the REV button on the MFD to revert the MFD to a PFD.
Observe both the PFD and MFD1000 during the flight checks below.
11.1 Basic ADI Flight Checks (PFD and EFD1000 MFD in reversion)
Fly the aircraft in straight and level flight and verify that the ADI roll indication is level
with reference to the horizon. Observe the Slip Indicator is centered under the Roll
pointer and adjust rudder trim if available to center.
a) Make a coordinated 30 degree banked turn to the right and verify that the ADI roll
indication is correct with reference to the horizon.
b) Make a coordinated 30 degree banked turn to the left and verify the ADI roll
indication is correct with reference to the horizon.
c) Pitch the aircraft up 10 degrees and verify the ADI pitch indication is correct with
reference to the horizon.
d) Pitch the aircraft down 10 degrees and verify the ADI pitch indication is correct
with reference to the horizon.

11.2 Basic HSI/DG Flight Checks (PFD and EFD1000 MFD in reversion)
a) Make a 180 degree coordinated turn to the right and verify that the compass scale
and numerical heading indication correctly track the aircraft heading during the
turn.
b) Make a 180 degree coordinated turn to the left and verify that the compass scale
and numerical heading indication correctly track the aircraft heading during the
turn.
c) Then turn from West to North (30 Angle of Bank) and, using an outside reference,
roll out to a northerly heading. (In the Southern Hemisphere, also turn West to
South)
d) Immediately after the aircraft rolls out, record the heading indication.
e) Maintain the same heading by outside visual reference. There may be some
movement of the heading indicator as the heading system stabilizes.
f) When the heading stabilizes, record the heading again. Then perform the test
from East to North (In the southern Hemisphere, also turn east to South).
If the difference between the heading on rollout and the heading after stabilizing
is more than 7, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide, Appendix A.

11.3 ILS Flight Checks PFD (EFD1000 MFD and EFD1000 Secondary HSI)
a) Hand fly an ILS approach and verify that the raw data on the PFD and MFD for
Lateral and Vertical Deviation Indicators are correctly displayed. Check the CDI
indication for correct needle displacement. Momentarily verify the MFD Secondary
HSI also shows the lateral and vertical deviation indicators correctly.
b) Check ILS2 if installed.

11.4 Autopilot Flight Checks (if installed, PFD only)
WARNING: Remember to disconnect the Autopilot immediately if it is
not performing its intended function.
With wings level and the HDG Bug centered under the lubber line, deselect GPSS and
engage the autopilot in HDG Mode and ALT Hold Mode (if available). Verify that the
aircraft makes no abrupt turns during engagement and the aircraft continues to track
straight.
a) Now turn the HDG Bug 10 degrees to the right and verify the aircraft smoothly
turns to the right with a bank angle not exceeding 10 degrees. If 10 degrees was
acceptable in performance then proceed by turning the HDG Bug 90 degrees to
the right and verify the aircraft makes a standard rate turn and smoothly rolls out
on to the correct Heading.
b) Now repeat the test to the left.
c) With VLOC1 selected (VOR1 source indication) and a VOR Station tuned. Adjust the
CRS pointer to center the CDI. Engage the autopilot in NAV Mode and verify the
aircraft tracks to the VOR.
d) Repeat with NAV2, if installed.
e) Enter a valid flight plan or Direct To on the GPS. Couple the GPS to the HSI.
Engage the autopilot in NAV Mode, verify the autopilot tracks the GPS. (Note: GPSS
is disabled for this test, this test is verifying the GPS deviations to the autopilot)
f) Repeat with GPS2, if installed.
g) For GPS receivers using ARINC 429 interfaces, enable GPSS and engage the
autopilot in HDG Mode. Verify the autopilot tracks the GPS flight plan. Place the
GPS into OBS (HOLD) Mode (some GPS installations may require manual disabling
of AUTOCRS). Use the CRS Pointer on the HSI to steer the autopilot via the GPS.
With the HDG Bug centered, press the GPSS button again and verify the HDG Bug
controls the autopilot as before.
h) Perform an ILS approach using VLOC1 (ILS1 source indication). Verify that the
autopilot tracks the localizer, then captures and tracks the glideslope if installed.
i) Now repeat with ILS2 if installed.
j) If your GPS supports GPS WAAS LPV approaches, perform an LPV approach using
GPS1. Verify that the autopilot tracks the GPS lateral approach guidance, then
captures and tracks the GPS LPV vertical guidance.
k) Repeat with GPS2, if installed.

11.5 Document Test Flight
This completes the flight test. If everything was satisfactory then document the
completion of the Test Flight in aircraft log book in accordance with FAR 91.407(b).



12 Operating Instructions
The operation section describes all of the features of the PRO model with all available sensor
options configured. Should your installation not include a particular sensor (i.e., NAV2,
autopilot) then that system feature will be not available. The PRO DIGITAL model has all the
features of the PRO minus the autopilot interface.
Basic operation of the EFD1000 MFD and EFD500 MFD are covered in this section. For detailed
operating instructions see the MFD pilots guide.

12.1 Pilot Controls
12.1.1 Overview
Pilot interaction with the EFD1000/EFD500 is accomplished through two knobs with
push/rotate function and 11 buttons located on the display bezel. Refer to
Figure 12.1.

Two control knobs are used to control pilot settable bugs and references.

Three lower push buttons, located between the control knobs, are used to select
navigation sources for the bearing pointers and the HSI.

Three dedicated buttons on the upper side of the right bezel control map range,
display reversion, and provide access the main menu.

Five soft keys on the lower half of the right bezel control frequently used commands,
such as the HSI mode or map de-clutter setting. These five keys are also used when
navigating the main menu.

12.1.2 Power Control
To enhance safety, the EFD1000/EFD500 includes an internal or Emergency Backup
Battery (Optional, EFD1000 MFD) that allows the system to continue to operate in the
event of a failure of the aircraft electrical system. This ensures that in addition to the
standby instruments, the EFD1000 primary flight instrument and the EFD1000 MFD
continues to remain available for a period of time following the loss of all external
supply power.

If the EFD1000 MFD is being used for required standby instruments then the EBB58
Emergency Backup Battery is required by regulation. See AFMS for instructions on
testing prior to flight

The typical EFD1000 installation receives aircraft power from the battery bus via a
dedicated circuit breaker and EFIS Master and optional MFD Master switch.

Whenever indicated airspeed is invalid or below 30 KIAS the EFD1000 will power up
and power down with the application or removal of external power. A message is
presented during the normal power down sequence to enable the pilot to abort the
shutdown and switch to internal battery.

When IAS is greater than 30 KIAS and the input voltage drops below 12.3V (14V
Electrical System) or 24.6V (28V Electrical System) the EFD will automatically switch to
its internal battery (e.g. aircraft charging system failure).

The EFD1000 internal battery (or Emergency Backup Battery in the case of the 910-
00001-002 EFD) will provide at least 30 minutes of power when it is fully charged.
The battery provides power to the display head, RSM and emergency GPS. Reducing
the backlight intensity will extend the battery operating time.

When operating from battery, a red ON BAT annunciation and battery charge status
indication is presented in the lower portion of the Attitude Indicator.

A unit operating from battery may be powered off using the Shut Down command
available in the Power Settings Menu.

In the unlikely event that the normal power control is not working, the EFD may be
forced to shut down by first pulling its associated circuit breaker and then pressing
and holding the REV button for at least 5 seconds.

Battery charge status may be viewed from the Power Settings page of the Main Menu.

12.1.3 PFD Display and Control Layout
NOTE: The MFD control layout is similar to the
PFD. The display button (#9) selects the
view.

Figure 12.1 Bezel and Display Features

PFD Controls

1) Reversion Control
2) Range Control
3) Menu Control
4) TPS Tapes ON/OFF Control
5) MIN Minimums ON/OFF Control
6) 360/ARC HSI View Control
7) MAP Map declutter logic Control
8) GPSS GPS Steering ON/OFF Control
9) Right Control Knob
10) Left Control Knob
11) Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select
12) CDI Source Control
13) Dual-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select
14) Micro SD Card slot
15) Automatic Dimming Photocell
16) Attitude Indicator
17) Aircraft Symbol
18) Single Cue Flight Director (optional
compatible autopilot required)
19) Roll Pointer
20) Slip / Skid Indicator
21) Airspeed Indicator Tape
22) Selected Airspeed Field
23) Airspeed Drum/Pointer
24) Altitude Alert
25) Selected Altitude Field
26) Altitude Drum/Pointer
27) Altitude Tape
28) MINIMUMS annunciation
29) Selected Minimums Field
30) Decision Height DH Annunciation
31) LDI Navigation Source Indication
32) Lateral Deviation Indicator
33) Vertical Deviation Indicator
34) True Airspeed
35) Barometric Pressure Setting Field
36) Ground Speed
37) OAT
38) Wind Direction Arrow
39) Wind Direction and Speed
40) Selected Source Information Field
41 Selected Course (CRS)Field
42) Selected Heading Field
43) Vertical Speed Digital Value
44) Vertical Speed Tape
45) Left Control Knob state
46) Right Control Knob state
47) Single-Needle Bearing Pointer Source
48) Single-Needle Source Info Block
49) Dual-Needle Bearing Pointer Source
50) Dual-Needle Source Info Block
51) CDI Navigation Source
52) Magnetic Heading
53) Compass Scale
54) Hot Key legend
55) CRS Pointer
56) Single-Needle Bearing Pointer
57) Double-Needle Bearing Pointer
58) Heading Bug
59) Airspeed Bug
60) Altitude Bug
12.1.4 Control Knobs
General
Two control knobs on the EFD bezel are used to adjust pilot editable data fields on the
EFD. The left knob adjusts data fields on the left side of the display, and the right knob
adjusts data fields on the right side of the display.

The knob logic includes active and inactive states to prevent inadvertent adjustment of
editable fields. After 10 seconds of inactivity, the knob returns to an inactive home
state. A single push activates an inactive knob. Pushing the knob again will advance the
knob to the next editable field in a round-robin sequence.

When inactive, the knob legend is rendered in Cyan. Once activated, the knob legend
and associated data field and bug (where appropriate) are rendered in magenta.
The MFD control knobs select the views and the pages.

12.2 Traffic Display (optional)
Traffic is displayed on the PFD as an overlay on the HSI display. To enable traffic press the
TRFC line select key to highlight. To remove the overlay press the TRFC line select key
again.
Traffic may be displayed on the MFD as either a dedicated traffic display or as an overlay
with other data.
See the PFD and MFD Pilots Guides for additional operational information.

12.3 XM Weather Display (optional)
XM Weather on the PFD is an overlay on the HSI display. To enable XM Wx press the NXRD
line select key to highlight. To remove the overlay press the NXRD line select key again.
XM Weather may be displayed on the MFD as either a dedicated XM Weather display or as an
overlay with other data.

12.4 WX-500 Display (optional)
WX-500 data is displayed on the PFD as an overlay on the HSI display. To enable lightning
press the LTNG line select key to highlight. To remove the overlay press the LTNG line
select key again. STRK and CELL indications show the WX-500 functions.
Lightning may be displayed on the MFD as either a dedicated lightning display or as an
overlay with other data.



13 Environmental Qualification Forms

Nomenclature: EFD1000/500 Evolution Flight Display with Configuration Module
Part Number: A-05-110-00, 910-00001-001, 910-00001-002 (including EBB58),
910-00001-003, and CM: A-05-113-00 and 910-00005-004
TSO Numbers: TSO-C2d, TSO-C3d, TSO-C4c, TSO-C6d, TSO-C8d, TSO-C10b,
TSO-C106, TSOC113
Manufacturer: Aspen Avionics, Inc
Address: 5001 Indian School Road NE, Albuquerque, NM 87110
DO-160 Revision: DO-160E
Date Tested: 2/2008
CONDITIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION OF TESTS CONDUCTED
Temperature and Altitude
(Pressurized)
4.0 Equipment tested to Category A1, Decompress to 55,000, Controlled temp and
pressurized to <15,000
Temperature and Altitude
(Unpressurized)
4.0 Equipment tested to Category C1, Controlled temp and non-pressurized to 35,000
Loss of Cooling 4.5.5 Equipment tested to Category Y, 300 minutes min.
Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category C
Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category A, standard humidity environment
Operational Shock and Crash
Safety
7.0 Equipment tested to Category B, standard operational shock and crash safety
Vibration (Fixed Wing) 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 2 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating & Turboprop
Engines, Multi Eng over 5700 KG (12,500 lbs), Multi Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs),
and Single Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs) using vibration test curve M.
Explosive Atmosphere 9.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Sand and Dust 12.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fungus 13.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Salt Fog Test 14.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment tested to Category Z, causes < 0.5 deg deflection to compass 0.3 meter away
Power Input 16.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Voltage Spike 17.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Audio Freq Conducted
Susceptibility
18.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Induced Signal Susceptibility 19.0 Equipment tested to Category ZC
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested for conducted susceptibility to Category W and for radiated
susceptibility Category W. Bench test to show compliance with interim HIRF rules. 100V/m
RF Emissions 21.0 Equipment tested to Category M, significant EM apertures, not in direct view of radio
receiver antenna (Equipment mounted in cockpit or cabin area)
Lighting Induced Transient 22.0 Equipment tested to Category B3K33, moderately exposed all-metal airframes, airframes
composed of metal framework and all composite skin panels or carbon fiber composite
airframes whose major surface areas have been protected with metal meshes or foils
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Icing 24.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
ESD 25.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Fire, Flammability 26.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Other Tests Fire resistance was conducted by analysis in accordance with Federal Aviation Regulations
Part 25, Appendix F.
Table 13.1 - EFD1000 Environmental Qualification Form
Nomenclature: EFD1000 Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
Part Number: A-05-111-00, 910-00003-001, 910-00003-002, 910-00003-003
TSO Numbers: TSO-C113
Date Tested: 2/2008

Temperature and Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category F2, non-controlled temp and non-pressurized to 55,000
Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category A, external, non-temperature controlled - 10 deg. C/minute
Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category C, external humidity environment
Operational Shocks 7.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Vibration 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 1 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating & Turboprop
Engines, Multi Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs) (does not include structure directly
affected by jet efflux), and Single Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs) using vibration test
curve M.
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment tested to Category S
Fluid Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment tested to Category F, deicing fluids and aircraft cleaning compounds only
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment tested to Category Z, causes < 0.5 deg deflection to compass 0.3 meter away
Power Input 16.0 n/a - Powered from PFD display
Voltage Spike 17.0 n/a - Powered from PFD display
Susceptibility
18.0 n/a - Powered from PFD display
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested to Category WW, (Conducted/Radiated) Bench test to show compliance with
interim HIRF rules. 100V/m
RF Emissions 21.0 Equipment tested to Category H, direct view of radio receiver antenna. (equipment mounted
outside airframe)
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment tested to Category 2A, mounted in area with sweptback attachment, but no hang
on
Icing 24.0 Equipment tested to Category C, external environment
Table 13.2 - RSM Environmental Qualification Form

Nomenclature: Analog Converter Unit
Part Number: A-05-112-00, 910-00004-001
TSO Numbers: TSO-C113
Date Tested: 2/2008

Temp/ Altitude (Pressurized) 4.0 Equipment tested to Category C4, controlled temp and pressurized to <15,000
Temp/ Altitude 4.0 Equipment tested to Category C4, Operating low temperature -40C, Operating High +55C,
Short Time Operating Low -40C, Short-Time Operating High +70C, Loss of Cooling, N/A,
Ground Survival Low -55C, Ground Survival High +85C and non-pressurized to 35,000
Temperature Variation 5.0 Equipment tested to Category C, internal, temperature controlled - 2 deg. C/minute
Humidity 6.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Operational Shocks and Crash
Safety
Vibration (Fixed Wing) 8.0 Equipment tested to Category S, aircraft Zone 2 for Fixed Wing Reciprocating & Turboprop
Engines, Multi Eng over 5700 KG (12,500 lbs), Multi Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs),
and Single Eng Less than 5700 KG (12,500 lbs) using vibration test curve M.
Waterproofness 10.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Fluids Susceptibility 11.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Magnetic Effect 15.0 Equipment tested to Category Z , causes < 1.0 deg deflection to compass 0.3 meter away
Power Input 16.0 Equipment tested to Category B
Voltage Spike 17.0 Equipment tested to Category A
Susceptibility
RF Susceptibility 20.0 Equipment tested to Category WW, (Conducted/Radiated) Bench test to show compliance with
interim HIRF rules. 100V/m
RF Emissions 21.0 Equipment tested to Category M, significant EM apertures, not in direct view of radio receiver
antenna (Equip mounted in cockpit or cabin area)
Lightning Direct Effects 23.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Icing 24.0 Equipment identified as Category X, no test performed
Table 13.3 - ACU Environmental Qualification Form




APPENDIX A
TROUBLESHOOTING

System Troubleshooting
Fault Cause Corrective Action
Display does not power on
(Note: there can be up to a 20
second delay from the
application of power to a
visible display)
a) PFD missing A/C power

b) PFD may have been
improperly shut down

c) PFD missing A/C ground
d) PFD is defective
a) Check PFD circuit breaker, PFD on/off
switch on panel, wiring, and A/C battery
voltage > 11.5 volts.
b) Switch unit off using REV button or
SHUT DOWN command from Main
Menu page 6.
c) Check wiring to PFD
d) Repair or replace PFD
Display does not power off
(Note: PFD will switch to
internal battery if airspeed is
greater than 30kts.)
a) Airspeed is above 30kts
b) PFD may have been switched
to internal battery

c) PFD may have been
improperly shut down

d) PFD is defective
a) Normal operation
b) Switch unit off using REV button or
SHUT DOWN command from Main
Menu page 6.
c) Hold REV button for 20 seconds or
unplug PFD internal battery for 3
seconds
Display flashes on/off,
black/white or blue/white
repetitively
a) Configuration Module
unplugged or miss wired
b) RSM or CM wiring short

c) Configuration module
defective
d) PFD defective
a) Check CM plug and wiring from PFD
to CM
b) Verify RSM pin 6 or CM pin 1 is not
shorted to aircraft ground or another
pin.
c) Repair or replace CM

CONFIG MODULE LINK FAIL
message
a) Configuration Module
unplugged or miss wired
b) Configuration module
defective
c) PFD defective
a) Check CM plug and wiring from PFD
to CM
b) Repair or replace CM

c) Repair or replace PFD
INITIALIZING message for
more than 60 seconds
a) RSM to PFD communication
lost
b) RSM failed
c) PFD failed
a) Check RSM to PFD wiring for shorts or
opens.
b) Repair or replace RSM
RSM LINK FAIL message a) RSM to PFD communication
lost
b) RSM failed
c) PFD failed
a) Check RSM to PFD wiring for shorts or
opens.
WRONG CONFIG MODULE
message
a) PFD is at one software level
and config module is at a
different software level
a) Convert config module per
appropriate service bulletin.
ALTIMETER, AIRSPEED, VSI FAIL
(RED-X)
a) Air data sensor has not had
sufficient warm-up time.
b) Pitot/static lines reversed

c) Air data sensor failed
a) Allow up to 20 minutes at temps
below -20C for flags to clear
b) Connect pitot line to P port and
static line to S port on PFD
System Troubleshooting continued

ATTITUDE FAIL or DIRECTION
FAIL ( RED-X)
(Note: Attitude flags could take
up to 3 minutes to clear at
temps below -20 C)
a) AHRS sensor has not
completed initialization.
b) RSM failed/data missing.

c) Pitot and/or Static lines
crossed, unplugged, or
blocked.
d) PFD is defective
a) Allow up to 3 minutes for AHRS to
initialize.
b) Check RSM to PFD wiring. Repair or
replace RSM.
c) Correct pitot/static plumbing issue.

d) Repair or replace PFD.
ATTITUDE FAIL and DIRECTION
FAIL associated with CHECK
PITOT HEAT message
a) In Flight, Normal if pitot
blockage due to ice or other.
b) On Ground, Normal if GPS
reception is marginal and GPS
GS ramps above 50Kts
intermittently.
a) Use pitot heat or check pitot system
for blockage.
b) No further action required unless
message is due to faulty GPS system,
then repair GPS system.
CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE
message (yellow)
(also see sluggish AHRS
performance troubleshooting)
a) If it occurred on system
start.
b) Normal after abrupt
maneuvers on ground or in air
a) RESET AHRS

b) RESET AHRS

Red Slash through Navigation
Sensor (i.e., GPS1, NAV2)
a) GPS or VLOC receiver turned
off.
b) GPS does not have a valid
TO waypoint and position
c) GPS or VLOC receiver failed

d) ACU not powered
e) Wiring fault between sensor
and ACU or PFD
f) ACU to PFD wiring fault.

g) ACU is defective.
h) PFD is defective.
a) Turn on GPS or VLOC receiver

b) Allow GPS to acquire a position and
enter a flight plan or Direct To
c) See GPS/VLOC manufacturers
instructions for troubleshooting
d) Check ACU circuit breaker
e) Check wiring between GPS/VLOC and
ACU or PFD
f) Check ACU circuit breaker, check ACU
to PFD A429 wiring and ACU to sensor
wiring
g) Repair or replace ACU
h) Repair or replace PFD
GPS1 or GPS2 selection not
available on Display (GNS430
and GNS530 only)
a) GPS receiver turned off
b) GPS does not have a valid
TO waypoint and position
c) GNS CDI is selected to VLOC.
d) GPS to PFD A429 wiring
issue.
e) GPS defective.
f) PFD defective.
a) Turn on GPS and initialize
b) Allow GPS to acquire a position and
enter a flight plan or Direct To
c) Verify the GNS CDI is selected to GPS.
d) Check A429 wiring for shorts, opens
or crossed A and B lines.
e) Repair or replace GPS
f) Repair or replace PFD

Autopilot or analog NAV/GPS
inoperative
a) ACU chassis not grounded

b) ACU not powered

c) ACU to sensor wiring
d) ACU to PFD wiring
e) ACU fault
f) PFD fault
a) Ground ACU chassis to airframe
ground
b) Check ACU circuit breaker and
power/grounds
c) Check ACU to sensor wiring
d) Check ACU to PFD A429 wiring
e) Repair or replace ACU
f) Repair or replace PFD
ERRONEOUS CALIBRATION
VALUES message during RSM
Cal (SW v2.0 and later)
or
Excessive Heading errors in
one quadrant, or errors that
are higher than actual in some
quadrants and lower than
actual in other quadrants.
a) RSM is tilted more than
allowed per Section 6 of this
manual
b) Poor RSM calibration

c) RSM calibrated too close to
buildings or ferrous objects
d) Ferrous hardware used to
mount RSM
e) Airframe or external
magnetic interference
a) Shim RSM to within limits defined in
Section 6 of this manual

b) Re-run RSM calibration at constant
rate turns on flat ground.
c) Re-run RSM calibration away from
buildings and other ferrous objects
d) Only stainless screws, nuts, washers
may be used on RSM
e) Check for magnetized areas on
airframe close to RSM. Verify no ferrous
hardware is near RSM. Degauss
magnetized area(s)
Sluggish or Poor AHRS (ADI)
performance

Poor AHRS performance in
steep bank turns

Sluggish compass card

(Note: may or may not be
associated with Cross Check
Attitude message)

a) RSM magnetic interference

b) RSM has become
magnetized.

c) Pitch Attitude Trim or
Panel Tilt Pitch Compensation
adjustment made without
performing a subsequent RSM
Calibration.
d) Pitot and/or Static line
connections at PFD blocked,
kinked, or unplugged.
e) Normal after abrupt
maneuvers.
a) Survey RSM location using handheld
compass per Section 6.9.1. Verify there
are no cabin speakers within 3ft of RSM.
Degauss any areas found to be
magnetized or remove magnetism by
other methods.
b) With power removed from EFD1000
system degauss RSM and general area
using degausser.
c) Perform an RSM Calibration per
Section 10.5.2

d) Check pitot/static connections and
plumbing for blockage. Check IAS and
ALT sensor per Section 10.
e) Perform AHRS Reset
Excessive Heading Lead / Lag
during or after turns (>7)
Magnetic Interference
Verify that all steps have been
accomplished to remove magnetic
interference (see 6.9.1), then
contact an Aspen Field Service
Engineer
Autopilot has lateral offset in
GPSS or APPR mode
(HDG Bug may also be out of
center)
a) Autopilot roll null
centering out of adjustment
a) Follow the autopilot manufacturers
guidelines for adjusting roll null
centering
Century II/III autopilot
performance poor in all modes
a) Value of R1 set incorrectly a) Follow the autopilot manufacturers
instructions for checking NAV intercept
angle. Larger value for R1 will raise
angle and smaller value of R1 will lower
intercept angle. See Tech Note 2009-06.
OAT Display dashed a) Wiring fault between PFD
and RSM
b) RSM is defective
a) Check wiring

WIND vector, velocity, and
direction display dashed
(Note: wind readout will dash
when velocity is < 10 kts)
a) Groundspeed < 20kts
b) No GPS ground track
c) Airspeed failed
a) Normal operation
b) GPS not computing GTK
c) See AIRSPEED FAIL troubleshooting
procedure
OBS mode inoperative on GPS a) GPS A429 IN bus configured
wrong
b) ARINC 429 A and B lines
reversed
a) See Figure 9.27 for GPS configuration
notes
b) Correct wiring error to GPS A429 IN
bus
CROSS LINK FAILURE message a) PFD or MFD not powered up
b) PFD or MFD inter-system
bus wiring fault
c) PFD or MFD is defective
a) Power up all EFD displays
b) Check wiring per diagrams in
Section 9
c) Repair or Replace defective EFD
DATABASE FAILURE message a) Data Card (microSD) is not
inserted in MFD display.
b) Wrong Data Card inserted

c) Data Card is bad
d) MFD card slot is defective
a) Insert Data Card in display

b) Insert correct Data Card See Section 1
for authorized database part numbers
c) Replace data card with new
d) Repair or replace MFD display
TERRAIN FAIL message a) Data Card not inserted
b) Data Card failed
c) Heading fail

d) GPS position fail
e) Altitude fail
a) Insert valid MFD Database
b) Insert valid MFD Database
c) Verify EFD1000 MFD Direction
Indicator is valid and repair if needed.
EFD500 MFD inter-communication bus
to PFD may have failed or is not
configured.
d) Verify GPS has good position data
e) Verify EFD1000 Altitude is valid.
EFD500 MFD intercommunication bus to
PFD may have failed or is not
configured.
TRFC FAIL message a) Traffic sensor is configured
but not valid.
a) Verify traffic processor is turned on
and is operational.

Dedicated Traffic Display page
messages
See AFMS or pilots guide
Dedicated WX500 Display page
messages
Dedicated XM Weather Display
page messages


APPENDIX B
INSTALLATION FINAL CHECK SHEET

EFD1000/500 Installation Final Check Sheet
(page 1 of 4)

Aircraft Type: Date:
Aircraft Serial Number: Tail Number:
The following four (4) pages must be printed and used during checkout. The Section number
refers to the section in the manual where the test is performed. This form must be included in
document package to be included in aircraft maintenance records.
Complete by performing test of Section 10.5.4(EFD1000)
Calibrated
Heading
Source
TOLERANCE Actual PFD
Heading
Calibrated
Heading
Source
TOLERANCE Actual PFD
Heading
Actual
MFD
Heading
30 +/- 4 210 +/- 4
60 +/- 4 240 +/- 4
90 +/- 4 270 +/- 4
120 +/- 4 300 +/- 4
150 +/- 4 330 +/- 4
180 +/- 4 360 +/- 4

Complete by performing test of Section 10.6.1(EFD1000)
IAS Setting Band
Color
Band
Range
Description Pass
V
ne
= Red >V
ne
Red arc displayed at all speeds above V
ne

V
no
= Yellow V
no
- V
ne
Yellow arc extending from V
no
to V
ne

V
s
= Green V
s
- V
no
Green arc extending from V
s
to V
no

V
fe
= White V
so
- V
fe
Top of White arc
V
so
= White Bottom of White Arc
V
yse
= Blue
Marker
= V
yse
Blue Marker at V
yse

V
mc
= Red
Marker
= V
mc
Red Marker at V
mc

=
Triangle
(White)
= White triangle at initial flap extension
airspeed

NOTE: Single engine aircraft and aircraft with no flaps will not use all parameters above

(page 2 of 4)
SECTION POST INSTALLATION TESTS PASS FAIL
10.5.4* Heading Accuracy Check (from Page 1 of 4)
10.5.5* Heading Interference Test
10.6.1* Indicated Airspeed Test
10.6.2* Altitude Display Test
10.6.3* System Leak Test
10.6.4* OAT- Outside Air Temperature Test (if ENABLED)
10.6.5* AHRS (attitude solution) Test
10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test - GPS1 (if installed)
10.6.6 GPS Sensor Test GPS2 (if installed)
10.6.6* RSM GPS Sensor Test 9if ENABLED)
10.6.7 NAV Receiver Sensor Test NAV1 (if installed)
10.6.7 NAV Receiver Sensor Test NAV2 (if installed)
10.6.8* Back-up NAV Indicator Test (if installed)
10.6.9* Autopilot Sensor Test (if installed)
10.6.10* Flight Director Test (if installed
10.6.11* Sonalert Test (if installed)
10.6.12* Decision Height Test (if installed)
10.6.13 Traffic Display Test (if installed)
10.6.14 XM Weather Display and Control Test (if installed)
10.6.15 WX-500 Display and Control Test (if installed)
10.6.16*
10.6.17*
Ancillary Equipment Heading and Air Data (if connected)
List equipment interfaced:

10.6.18 EFD Inter-System Communication Check (if multi-display)
10.6.19 Battery Capacity Check EBB and Internal batteries > 80%
Charge

10.6.20* TAPES Configuration Check
10.6.21 EMI Test
10.6.22 Flight Control Interference Check
*Does not apply to an EFD500
(page 3 of 4)
SECTION COMPLIANCE CHECK PASS FAIL
6.4 Weight and Balance performed
7.1 Electrical Load Analysis performed for each EFD
5.2.1 For aircraft not limited to VFR, a Standby Attitude indicator
must be installed in accordance with section 5.2.1

5.2.2 Standby Airspeed, Altimeter must be installed in accordance
with section 5.2.2

5.2 Is the EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery installed for
installations that removed standby Airspeed Indicator
and/or Altimeter and replaced them with the MFD1000.

6.5.3 Verify the EBB58 wiring harness and the EFD1000 MFDs
RSM wiring is isolated/separated from the EFD1000 PFDs
RSM wiring to provide independence.

5.2.8 For aircraft limited to VFR, a placard or equivalent
acceptable means, stating Operation of This Aircraft is
Limited to VFR Only, or similar phraseology acceptable to
the FAA. Note: This placard should be pre-existing under
TC or STC. This step is to verify that the placard is still
present

5.2.4 Backup Navigation Indicator (if required) connected to a
navigation source installed in pilots field of view. The
indicator must continue to function if the PFD and/or ACU
circuit breaker is pulled

7.2 Circuit breaker installed for each EFD and each ACU.
6.9.1 RSM location(s) shows less than 2 degrees of needle
deflection on hand held compass within 18x18 survey
area

10.1.2 Each EFD braided ground strap is installed between unit and
panel, RSM ground wire attached to ground stud, RSM
doubler/mounting plate bonded to airframe ground and
ACU(s) chassis bonded to airframe ground. All measure no
greater than .003 ohms to ground.

7.2 Wires, cables, and connectors clearly marked or stamped
7.2, 5.2.7 When installed, EFD1000/500 master switch(s) and/or
circuit breakers and EBB58 EMER DISC switch must be
easily accessible to flight crew and clearly marked.
One switch exists for each display.

(page 4 of 4)
SECTION COMPLIANCE CHECK PASS FAIL
11 Post Installation Flight Test
11.4 Document successful completion of flight test in aircraft log
book per FAR 91.407b

5.2 In aircraft with independent pitot/static systems each
EFD1000 must be connected to different systems.

5 If an EFD1000 MFD is installed then each EFD1000 display is
connected to an IFR GPS

6.8.5 EFD1000 PFD and EFD1000 MFD (if installed) do not share
the same ground strap location.

6.6 Dual RSMs harness shielding (if installed) does not share the
same ground path (bonding strap location).

6.8.6 If an EFD1000 MFD is installed there is an alternate static
source available to the pilot.

5.2 The EFD displays all have the same software version.
5.2.6 The EBB58 may only be installed in a multiple display
configuration and may only be connected to an EFD1000
MFD no other connections are permitted.

6.3 Log book entry stating aircraft has been modified in
accordance with EFD1000 AML-STC.

1.10 Update warranty records on Aspen Avionics website at
www.aspenavionics.com/dealerramp

Misc Complete the Installed Equipment Configuration Matrix in
Section 1.2 of the EFD1000 AFMS (900-00008-001) and
insert the completed AFMS in the Airplane Flight Manual.
(See sample Appendix C)

Misc Complete wire routing diagram Figure D1& D2 in Appendix
D. Complete circuit breaker and switch location diagram
Figure D3 in Appendix D.

Misc Copy of ICA Appendix D with copy of wiring diagrams
(Section 9 or installer drafted), copy of Configuration Pages
Section 10.4.6 and 10.4.7 for each installed EFD, and copy
of Pre-Modification Checklist Table 5.1 and 5.2 inserted.
This data package is to be given to owner/operator for
inclusion in aircraft permanent records.

Inspected by (print & sign)

Installer/ Inspector Date



APPENDIX C
OPERATOR CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST
And
Sample of AFMS Section 1.2
(Installed Equipment Configuration Matrix)
EFD1000 Operator Configuration Checklist

Aircraft Type: Aircraft S/N:
Aircraft Tail #:
Owner/Operator:
I request that the following settings be configured into my EFD1000 PFD as described below.
These airspeeds must match the requirements for the aircraft above and must match the values in
the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM), Pilot Operating Handbook (POH), or other legal form of
documentation (e.g., Placard).
V
ne
V
no
V
fe

V
s
V
so
V
yse Multi engine only
V
mc Multi engine only
initial flap extension speed

I also would like my V-Speed Textual Markers set as per below: (Note these may be edited by the
pilot unless LOCKED). Insert a zero 0 in any field you wish not to appear on display.
V
a
V
bg
V
ref
V
r
V
x
V
y
V
lo Retractable Gear only
V
le Retractable Gear only

I would like my Airspeed Textual Markers above: LOCKED / UNLOCKED (circle one)

Owner/ Operator Date

How to Fill Out AFMS Section 1.2
The Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement Section 1.2 contains information about the installed
configuration of the EFD systems in the customer aircraft. The installer must complete the table in
the AFMS before giving the complete AFMS document to the customer.
Enter a Yes in all applicable boxes noting the installed equipment. The backup Instrument type
and configurations are to be circled.

Sample - Installed Equipment Configuration Matrix
The following sample installation is of an EFD1000 PFD, EFD1000 MFD, EFD500 MFD with a -001 RSM
connected to the PFD and a -003 RSM connected to the EFD1000 MFD. It has a EWR50 XM receiver connected
to all three displays, a WX-500 connected to both MFDs, and no Traffic. The EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery
is installed because the standby airspeed and altimeter where removed and replaced with the EFD1000 MFD.

EFD500
MFD
EFD1000
PFD
EFD1000
MFD
Installed Evolution Flight Displays Yes Yes Yes
RSM with GPS N/A Yes
RSM without GPS, top mount N/A
RSM without GPS, bottom mount N/A Yes
EBB Emergency Backup Battery
Not
Authorized
Not
Authorized
Yes
Traffic Interface
Stormscope

Interface Yes Yes
XM Weather Interface (Requires optional
EWR50)
Yes Yes Yes

Backup Instruments:
Backup Attitude Indicator Required
Backup Attitude Power Source Battery Vacuum
Standby Airspeed Indicator YES NO*
Standby Altimeter YES NO*
*EBB Emergency Backup Battery and EFD1000 MFD are required if standby Airspeed indicator and
Altimeter are not installed.


Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

APPENDIX D
INSTRUCTIONS FOR CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS
Aspen Document # 900-00012-001 Revision D

AIRCRAFT MAKE:
AIRCRAFT MODEL:
AIRCRAFT SERIAL NUMBER:

Modification of an aircraft under the EFD1000 AML Supplemental Type Certificate obligates the
aircraft operator to include the maintenance information provided by this document in the
operators Aircraft Maintenance Manual and operators Aircraft Scheduled Maintenance Program.

This ICA consists of 15 pages not including the wiring and placement diagrams

ICA Document # 900-00012-001 REV D
Page D1 of 15
Page D2 of 15
ICA RECORD OF REVISION
Revision Date Description of Change
ICA
Revision
IR
8/25/09 INITIAL RELEASE - for TSO Approval
ICA
Revision
A
9/21/09 Made the ICA document stand-alone
ICA
Revision
B
9/25/09 Added bonding checks. Added pagination.

ICA
Revision
C
9/28/09
Added Procedures for System Testing During Ground Running
FAA Accepted
ICA
Revision
D
1/15/10
Increased battery replacement interval to three years or 800 hours, section D9
FAA Accepted

Page D3 of 15
D.1 Introductory Information
This ICA provides instructions necessary for authorized personnel to inspect and maintain the
EFD500 and EFD1000 system installed by the EFD1000 AML-STC. The following data may be
required for this maintenance:

Replacement Parts: See Section 1 of the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X
Installation Manual, document 900-00003-001 Rev D
or later.
Operating Instructions: See the EFD1000 AFMS, document 900-00008-001
Wire Routing Locations: See attachment to this document Figure D1 & D2 (part
of permanent aircraft records).
Wiring Diagrams: See attachment to this document (part of permanent
aircraft records).
Special Tools For bonding checks, use a milliohm meter such as an
Extech 380460 Portable Precision Milliohm Meter or
equivalent.

D.2 System Description
The EFD1000 PFD system is comprised of the Primary Flight Display (PFD), Remote Sensor Module
(RSM), Configuration Module (CM) and optional Analog Converter Unit (ACU). Optionally one or two
MFD displays of either the EFD500 or EFD1000 may be installed.
The EFD1000 PFD system provides display of attitude, airspeed, altitude, direction of flight, vertical
speed, turn rate, and turn quality. The system may optionally provide display of navigation
information through interfaces to GPS Receivers and/or VHF Navigation Receivers.
When interfaced with a compatible autopilot, the EFD1000 system provides heading and course
datum information to the autopilot, which enables the autopilot to follow the Course and Heading
values set by the pilot on the EFD1000.
If optional MFD displays are installed they can present terrain, traffic, XM weather, and WX-500
Stormscope data to the flight crew. The EFD1000 MFD can be used as backup instruments to the
PFD supporting reversionary capabilities. The EFD500 presents MFD data, but cannot be used for
backup or reversion.
An EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery may be required in some EFD1000 MFD installation
configurations if it is being used as any required secondary instruments.
Page D4 of 15
D.3 System Operation and Procedures for System Testing During Ground Running
Refer to the EFD1000 AFMS, document 900-00008-001 for instructions on system operation. For
System Testing refer to Section 10.6 of the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual, 900-
00003-001 Rev D or later.
D.4 Servicing
The PFD, MFD, RSM, ACU, CM, and EBB58 have no field serviceable components. Return defective
units to Aspen Avionics or an authorized dealer.
D.5 Overhaul Period
None required.

D.6 Special Tools
For bonding checks, use a milliohm meter such as an Extech 380460 Portable Precision Milliohm
Meter or equivalent.

D.7 Airworthiness Limitations
There are no Airworthiness limitations associated with the installation of this appliance. The
Airworthiness Limitations Section is FAA approved and specifies maintenance required under 14
CFR 43.16 and 91.403 unless an alternate program has been FAA approved.

D.8 Distribution of Revisions
Notification of changes to this ICA will be sent to all owners on record. The changed document will
then be available at www.aspenavionics.com. Paper copies are available on request, contact Aspen
Avionics at www.aspenavionics.com.

D.9 Periodic Maintenance and Calibration
All maintenance is considered ON CONDITION unless otherwise noted in this ICA.
EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery (use with MFD P/N 910-00001-002)
The EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery when installed must be visually inspected and tested
as described below once every 12 months to ensure it meets the minimum 30 minute
requirement for powering the EFD1000 MFD under all foreseeable conditions. The EBB58
must be replaced every 3 years or 800 hours (whichever occurs first), or if it fails the
following visual or operational tests.
Remove the EBB from the tray and visually inspect for the following:
Leakage from the battery especially around the metal seams
Evidence of water contamination
Evidence of corrosion
If any of the above issues are noted return the EBB58 to Aspen Avionics for repair.

Re-install the battery and check the battery capacity as follows: (this test must be run at
room temperature approximately 25 C)
Turn on the EFD1000 MFD
Press MENU Key
Select POWER SETTINGS, Main Menu page 10 of 11
Press the BATTERY line select key
BAT LEVEL IN --.-- will be displayed for a short period of time as battery capacity is being
measured. This could take up to 10 minutes if the ambient temperature is below 0 C.

Once the capacity is measured ON BAT XX% REM will be displayed.

The ON BAT indication must read a minimum of 80% to continue. If the battery capacity is
below 80% then the battery should be charged by returning the MFD to external power.
The EBB will charge as long as the MFD is turned on and external power is supplied.
With the battery displaying greater than 80% charge set a timer for one (1) hour. After the
one hour time has elapsed the MFD must still be operating on battery. If the EBB will not
supply the minimum 1 hour operating time or fails to charge above 80% return the battery
to Aspen Avionics for repair.
Instructions for battery replacement are contained in Section D.12.
Following the battery endurance test and while operating on battery power, switch the EBB
EMER DISC switch to DISC; verify the display powers OFF. Return the EBB EMER DISC
switch to NORM; verify the display powers ON and is on battery power.
Switch the MFD back to external power and recharge the EBB to 80% or greater prior to
release to service.
Page D5 of 15
EFD Internal Battery (EFD P/N 910-00001-001, and -003)
The internal back-up battery in the EFD must be tested once every 12 months to ensure it
operates properly. Each EFD with an internal battery must have the battery replaced every 3
years or 800 hours, or if it fails the following operational test.
This test must be run at room temperature approximately 25 C.
Turn on the EFD1000 or EFD500
Press MENU Key
Select POWER SETTINGS page from the Main Menu
Press the BATTERY line select key
BAT LEVEL IN --.-- will be displayed for a short period of time as battery capacity is being
measured. This could take up to 10 minutes if the ambient temperature is below 0 C.

Once the capacity is measured ON BAT XX% REM will be displayed.

The ON BAT indication must read a minimum of 80% to continue. If the battery capacity is
below 80% then the battery should be charged by returning the EFD to external power. The
battery will charge as long as the MFD is turned on and external power is supplied.
With the battery displaying greater than 80% charge set a timer for 30 minutes. After the
30 minute time has elapsed the EFD must still be operating on battery. If the internal
battery will not supply the minimum 30 minutes operating time or fails to charge above
80%, replace the battery and return the failed battery to Aspen Avionics.
Instructions for battery replacement are contained in Section D.12.
Switch the EFD back to external power and recharge the internal battery to 80% or greater
prior to release to service.

Instructions for battery replacement are contained in Section D.12. Contact customer
service at Aspen Avionics or an authorized Aspen Avionics Dealer for a replacement battery.
Page D6 of 15
Page D7 of 15
EFD Display Backlight
The EFD display backlight has a median expected life of 50,000 operating hours.
Replacement of the lamp is on-condition as it may last longer or shorter than 50,000
hours. It is up to the operator to determine whether the backlighting has become too dim
for its intended use.

ACU, RSM, CM
The ACU, RSM, and Configuration Module require no periodic maintenance or calibration.

D.10 Unit and Wiring Inspection
All units, brackets, installation hardware and wiring of the EFD1000 system should be checked as
defined below during annual inspection. Items found to be defective should be repaired or
replaced prior to returning the aircraft to service.

EFD Inspection
The EFD(s) should be inspected for damage and their operation should be verified using
documents from Section D1 of these ICAs. The EFD wiring should be checked for damage,
chafing, or excessive wear. The EFD braided bonding strap should be checked for proper
termination at the EFD and aircraft grounding point to maintain HIRF and Lightning
compliance. Verify 3 milliohms from PFD ground stud to airframe ground. The
installation of the EFD should be inspected for corrosion on the EFD and the structure it is
mounted on. The fasteners should be inspected for tightness and general condition.
ACU Inspection if installed
The ACU should be inspected for damage and its operation should be verified using
documents from Section D1 of these ICAs. ACU wiring should be checked for damage,
chafing, or excessive wear. Verify ACU chassis bonding to airframe ground is 3
milliohms to maintain HIRF and Lightning compliance. The installation of the ACU should
be inspected for corrosion on the ACU and the structure it is mounted on. The fasteners
should be inspected for tightness and general condition.
RSM Inspection
The RSM(s) should be visually inspected for damage and wear on the lightning strip. RSM
wiring should be checked for damage, chafing, or excessive wear. Verify RSM doubler plate
bonding from the ground stud to airframe ground is 3 milliohms to maintain HIRF and
Lightning compliance. The RSM installation and doubler should be inspected for corrosion
on the RSM, the RSM shim (optional), the fuselage skin, and the doubler. The installation
should be inspected for cracks in the fuselage, and loose or damaged fasteners.
Page D8 of 15
Configuration Module Inspection
The Configuration Module(s) should be checked for damage. The Configuration Module
wiring should be checked for damage, chafing, or excessive wear.
EBB58 Inspection if installed
The EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery should be inspected for damage to the battery and
mounting tray. Battery operation should be verified using Section D.9 of this ICA. Verify
3 milliohms from mounting tray to airframe ground. The wiring should be checked for
damage, chafing, or excessive wear.

D.11 Troubleshooting
See Appendix A of the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual, 900-00003-001 Rev D
or later for troubleshooting procedures.

D.12 Removal and Replacement
This section provides instructions for removal and replacement of LRUs that have been previously
installed in the aircraft. No special tools are required for the removal and replacement of any
system LRUs. If an LRU is found to be defective it should be removed and returned to Aspen
Avionics for repair or replacement.
EFD Removal
Verify power is off. Carefully insert a flat blade screw driver into the locking mechanism on
the top center of the EFD. While gently prying pull back the top of the EFD and extract from
bracket. Remove nut securing braided ground strap to EFD. Remove pitot and static quick
connectors (EFD1000 only) by pulling back outer spring loaded locking sleeve while
unplugging connectors. To remove 44 pin D-sub connector unscrew both jackscrews fully
and pull connector straight back.
EFD Replacement
Verify power is off. Install 44 pin D-sub connector and tighten jackscrews until connector
is fully seated. Install pitot and static lines (EFD1000 only) to back of EFD by firmly
pressing the fitting until fully seated (pitot and static quick connectors are keyed and
cannot be crossed). Gently pull on connector to ensure proper connection. Connect
braided bonding strap to EFD with nut. Insert bottom of EFD into bracket and pivot top
forward until it locks into place on bracket.
Using Section 10.6 of the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual, 900-00003-
001 Rev D or later, verify all system interfaces are functional. Verify proper bonding per
Section 10.1.2. Perform a System Leak Test (Section 10.6.3, EFD1000 systems only) and
Sonalert Test (Section 10.6.11, PFD only).
Page D9 of 15
EFD Battery Replacement
EFD battery replacement must only be performed by a properly certified individual or
facility. Remove EFD from panel as above. Remove two screws on each end of the football
shaped cover plate on rear of the EFD. Unplug electrical connector and slide battery out of
EFD. Install new battery in EFD then connect battery plug. Replace cover plate and tighten
the cover screws. Tighten to 12 in-lbs. Reinstall and test EFD as above.
ACU Removal
Verify power is off. Remove ACU by unscrewing the jackscrews of all three D-sub
connectors. Gently remove the connectors by pulling straight out. Remove the six (6) 6-32
mounting screws securing the ACU to the aircraft and remove unit from aircraft.

ACU Replacement
Verify power is off. Install ACU in mounting location and install six (6) 6-32 mounting
screws through holes in ACU mounting tabs. Tighten to 12 in-lbs. Install all three (3) D-
sub connectors securing each with the two jackscrews per connector.

Verify proper bonding per Section 10.1.2, then perform post installation tests in Sections
10.6.6, 10.6.7, 10.6.9, 10.6.10 of the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual
900-00003-001 Rev D or later.

CAUTION: Do not use a magnetic tipped screw driver when removing and replacing the
RSM.

RSM Removal
Verify power is off. It will be necessary to gain access to the underside of the RSM mounting
location in order to unplug the RSM connector. Unscrew RSM electrical connector from
inside and undo shield ground wire from ground stud. Remove sealant from around base
of RSM and on mounting screws. Remove four (4) 8-32 non-ferrous mounting screws from
RSM and remove RSM from aircraft taking care to guide 24 inch pigtail connector out
through inch hole in aircraft skin.

RSM Replacement
Verify power is off. Replace the O-ring on the RSM. Contact Aspen Avionics for replacement
O-ring (256-00001-001). Verify RSM shim is installed between aircraft skin and RSM if
required. Feed circular connector down through inch hole in aircraft skin and mount RSM
(vent hole faces aft) with four (4) 8-32 non-ferrous screws. Tighten to 12-15 in-lbs. It is
critical that the screws be non-ferrous to prevent the introduction of compass errors.
Connect the circular electrical connector and cable tie harness to prevent chaffing and
interference. Connect shield ground wire to ground stud. For RSM locations that are
external or in a wet environment seal around base and on top of four mounting screws of
the RSM using one of the following non-corrosive sealants:
Page D10 of 15
Non-pressure vessel mounting Dow Corning 738, MIL-A-46146 or equiv.
Pressure vessel mounting Pro-Seal PS 870B-1/2, MIL-PRF-81733D,
or equiv.
Verify proper bonding per Section 10.1.2, and perform RSM Calibration per Section 10.5 of
the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation Manual, 900-00003-001 Rev D or later. Also
check OAT operation per Section 10.6.4 and check RSM GPS operation per Section 10.6.6.

CM Removal
Verify power is off. Cut the two (2) cable ties affixing the CM to the PFD wiring harness.
Unplug the Molex connector by pressing down on the locking tab and gently pulling the
connector from the module.

CM Replacement
Verify power is off. Plug the Molex connector into the module until it clicks. Cable tie the
module to the PFD wiring harness.
Perform the Installation Menu Unit Configuration per section 10.4.5 of the EFD1000
Installation Manual, 900-00003-001 Rev D or later.
Perform RSM Calibration per Section 10.5 of the EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.X Installation
Manual, 900-00003- 001 Rev D or later.

EBB58 Removal
Verify power is off. Unscrew two jackscrews that secure the D-sub connector to the battery
and then unplug the connector. Spread battery tray hold down clips outward to release
battery and slide battery out of tray.

EBB58 Replacement
Verify power is off. Slide battery into tray until hold down clips lock into place. Install D-
sub connector and secure with both jackscrews.

NOTE: If the spring clip(s) are sprung so the pins do not fully seat, the mounting bracket
must be replaced.

Turn on EFD1000 MFD and switch unit to battery. Verify charge of 80% or greater. If
battery is below 80% then charge battery to above 80% by switching MFD back to external
power. EBB58 battery will recharge as long as MFD is powered up on external power.

EBB58 Tray Removal
Verify power is off. Remove the battery. Remove the four screws securing the tray to the
airframe.
Page D11 of 15

EBB58 Tray Replacement
Replace the four screws securing the tray to the airframe. Tighten to 12 in-lbs. Verify
proper bonding per Section 10.1.2 of the EFD1000 Installation Manual, 900-00003-001
Rev D or later.

INSTRUCTIONS:
1. Draw in MFD, RSM and optional ACU and autopilot locations as done for PFD (Figure D1 and D2)
2. Draw in circuit breaker and switch locations on instrument panel (Figure D3)
3. Draw in PFD and MFD to RSM cable routing.
4. Draw in ACU to PFD and ACU to autopilot cable routing.

Figure D1 EFD1000 Components and cable routing (top view)
Page D12 of 15
A

Figure D2 EFD1000 Components and cable routing (side view)
LRU Definitions
A) PFD (CM is wired within 6 of PFD) F) RSM (MFD) - optional
B) RSM (PFD) G) EBB58 Emergency Backup Battery optional
C) ACU#1 optional H) Autopilot computer location -optional
D) ACU#2 optional J) EWR50 location - optional
E) MFD#1 and MFD#2 -optional

Figure D3 Circuit Breaker and Switch Locations
Circuit Breaker and Switch Definitions
K) PFD/MFD circuit breakers M) ACU circuit breaker(s) - optional
L) PFD/MFD switch(s) O) EBB58 Emergency Disconnect Switch
when required

Page D13 of 15
Page D14 of 15

INSERT WIRING DIAGRAMS AFTER THIS PAGE
(The drawings must include detailed information on the interface of the
EFD1000 system suitable for system troubleshooting)

Page D15 of 15

INSERT THE FOLLOWING AFTER THIS PAGE
COMPLETED - CONFIGURATION CHART Section 10.4.6 & 10.4.7
COMPLETED - PRE-MODIFICATION CHECKLIST TABLE 5.1 & 5.2
COMPLETED - OPERATOR CONFIGURATION CHECKLIST FROM APPENDIX C
COMPLETED - EFD1000/500 INSTALLATION FINAL CHECKSHEET FROM APPENDIX B


END
This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Efd 1000 Install Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Efd 1000 Install Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EFD1000 and EFD500 SW v2.

You might also like